WO2024221471A1 - Control method, communication device, and storage medium - Google Patents
Control method, communication device, and storage medium Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2024221471A1 WO2024221471A1 PCT/CN2023/091883 CN2023091883W WO2024221471A1 WO 2024221471 A1 WO2024221471 A1 WO 2024221471A1 CN 2023091883 W CN2023091883 W CN 2023091883W WO 2024221471 A1 WO2024221471 A1 WO 2024221471A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- cell
- candidate cell
- downlink
- information
- candidate
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 135
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 title claims description 48
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 claims description 90
- 238000005070 sampling Methods 0.000 claims description 65
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 claims description 27
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 21
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 claims description 15
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 claims description 15
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 abstract description 26
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 34
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 26
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 14
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000010295 mobile communication Methods 0.000 description 3
- 101001121408 Homo sapiens L-amino-acid oxidase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102100026388 L-amino-acid oxidase Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 229910000577 Silicon-germanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000013307 optical fiber Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001690 polydopamine Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 2
- JBRZTFJDHDCESZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N AsGa Chemical compound [As]#[Ga] JBRZTFJDHDCESZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101000827703 Homo sapiens Polyphosphoinositide phosphatase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100023591 Polyphosphoinositide phosphatase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101100012902 Saccharomyces cerevisiae (strain ATCC 204508 / S288c) FIG2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100233916 Saccharomyces cerevisiae (strain ATCC 204508 / S288c) KAR5 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- LEVVHYCKPQWKOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Si].[Ge] Chemical compound [Si].[Ge] LEVVHYCKPQWKOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007599 discharging Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008030 elimination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003379 elimination reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010079 rubber tapping Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001629 suppression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010897 surface acoustic wave method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a control method, communication equipment and storage medium.
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization operation only after receiving the cell switching command, which includes measuring the synchronization broadcast block of the target cell to obtain time and frequency synchronization with the target cell, and detecting the physical layer cell ID of the target cell. Since the downlink synchronization operation is performed only after receiving the cell switching command, a long waiting time is required, resulting in a long delay in executing the cell switching.
- the main purpose of the present application is to provide a control method, a communication device and a storage medium, aiming to reduce the delay in the cell switching process.
- the present application provides a control method, which can be applied to a terminal device (such as a mobile phone), comprising the steps of:
- S4 Perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
- the method further comprises:
- S3 Acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
- step S3 includes at least one of the following:
- the measurement result of the candidate cell is determined according to the downlink signal, and the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset condition is acquired or obtained.
- the method comprises at least one of the following:
- the satisfying of the preset condition includes: an offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the measurement result of the source cell, and/or the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value;
- the acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes: acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to a time unit of a reference cell based on a preset rule.
- the method further comprises at least one of the following:
- the reference cell includes at least one of the following: a source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of a cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by a network device;
- the preset rules include at least one of the following: the number of time slots included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field; the number of symbols included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field; the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the sampling interval number field and/or the sampling interval number factor.
- the method further comprises at least one of the following:
- the first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command
- the downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field;
- the second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and a downlink signal.
- saving, updating, or clearing downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes at least one of the following:
- the present application also provides a control method, which can be applied to a network device (such as a base station), comprising the steps of:
- S2 Send the first downlink information so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information.
- the method further comprises:
- S1 Send the second downlink information so that the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
- the method comprises at least one of the following:
- the first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command
- the downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field;
- the second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and a downlink signal.
- the step of the terminal device acquiring or obtaining downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information includes at least one of the following:
- the terminal device selects or determines a candidate cell according to the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit and/or downlink control information, and obtains Obtain or obtain downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
- the terminal device determines the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, and obtains or acquires the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions.
- the present application also provides a communication device, comprising: a memory, a processor, and a control program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, wherein the control program implements the steps of any of the control methods described above when executed by the processor.
- the present application also provides a storage medium, wherein a computer program is stored on the storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of any of the control methods described above are implemented.
- the technical solution of the present application performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information, so that the terminal device can obtain or get the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell before receiving the cell switching command, and then perform downlink synchronization operations in combination with the first downlink information, thereby reducing the waiting time after receiving the cell switching command, thereby reducing the delay in the cell switching process.
- FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal for implementing various embodiments of the present application.
- FIG2 is a diagram of a communication network system architecture provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a controller 140 provided in the present application.
- FIG4 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a network node 150 provided in the present application.
- FIG5 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to the first embodiment
- FIG6 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a second embodiment
- FIG7 is a schematic diagram of a first example of a control method according to the second embodiment.
- FIG8 is a second exemplary schematic diagram of a control method according to the second embodiment.
- FIG9 is a schematic diagram of a third example of a control method according to the second embodiment.
- FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a fourth example of a control method according to the second embodiment.
- FIG11 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a third embodiment
- FIG12 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a fourth embodiment
- FIG13 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a fifth embodiment.
- FIG14 is a schematic diagram of a first example of a control method according to the seventh embodiment.
- FIG15 is a schematic diagram of a second example of a control method according to the seventh embodiment.
- FIG16 is a third exemplary schematic diagram of a control method according to the seventh embodiment.
- FIG17 is a schematic diagram of a fourth example of a control method according to the seventh embodiment.
- FIG18 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a ninth embodiment.
- FIG19 is a schematic diagram of a first interaction sequence according to the tenth embodiment.
- FIG20 is a schematic diagram of a second interaction sequence according to the tenth embodiment.
- FIG21 is a first structural diagram of a control device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG22 is a second structural schematic diagram of a control device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG23 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- first, second, third, etc. may be used herein to describe various information, such information should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish the same type of information from each other.
- first information may also be referred to as the second information
- second information may also be referred to as the first information.
- word “if” as used herein may be interpreted as “at the time of” or “when” or “in response to determining”.
- singular forms “a”, “an” and “an” are used interchangeably. "and” are intended to include plural forms as well, unless there is an indication to the contrary in the context.
- A, B, C means "any one of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C
- A, B or C or "A, B and/or C” means "any one of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C”.
- the words “if” and “if” may be interpreted as “at the time of” or “when” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting”, depending on the context.
- the phrases “if it is determined” or “if (stated condition or event) is detected” may be interpreted as “when it is determined” or “in response to determining” or “when detecting (stated condition or event)” or “in response to detecting (stated condition or event)", depending on the context.
- step codes such as S1 and S2 are used for the purpose of expressing the corresponding content more clearly and concisely, and do not constitute a substantial limitation on the order.
- S2 first and then S1, etc., but these should all be within the scope of protection of this application.
- module means, “component” or “unit” used to represent elements are only used to facilitate the description of the present application, and have no specific meanings. Therefore, “module”, “component” or “unit” can be used in a mixed manner.
- the communication device in this application can be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a base station).
- a terminal device such as a mobile phone
- a network device such as a base station
- the terminal device may be implemented in various forms.
- the terminal device described in this application may include intelligent terminal devices such as mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, PDAs, portable media players (PMPs), navigation devices, wearable devices, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc., as well as fixed terminal devices such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
- intelligent terminal devices such as mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, PDAs, portable media players (PMPs), navigation devices, wearable devices, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc.
- PDAs portable media players
- navigation devices wearable devices
- smart bracelets smart bracelets
- pedometers etc.
- fixed terminal devices such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal for implementing various embodiments of the present application.
- the mobile terminal 100 may include: an RF (Radio Frequency) unit 101, a WiFi module 102, an audio output unit 103, an A/V (audio/video) input unit 104, a sensor 105, a display unit 106, a user input unit 107, an interface unit 108, a memory 109, a processor 110, and a power supply 111.
- RF Radio Frequency
- the radio frequency unit 101 can be used for receiving and sending signals during information transmission or communication. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, it is sent to the processor 110 for processing; in addition, the uplink data is sent to the base station.
- the radio frequency unit 101 includes but is not limited to an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, etc.
- the radio frequency unit 101 can also communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication.
- the above-mentioned wireless communications may use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access 2000), WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), FDD-LTE (Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution), TDD-LTE (Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution), 5G and 6G, etc.
- GSM Global System of Mobile communication
- GPRS General Packet Radio Service
- CDMA2000 Code Division Multiple Access 2000
- WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
- TD-SCDMA Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access
- FDD-LTE Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution
- TDD-LTE Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution
- 5G and 6G etc.
- WiFi is a short-range wireless transmission technology.
- the mobile terminal can help users send and receive emails, browse web pages, and access streaming media through the WiFi module 102, which provides users with wireless broadband Internet access.
- FIG1 shows the WiFi module 102, it is understandable that it is not a necessary component of the mobile terminal and can be omitted as needed without changing the essence of the invention.
- the audio output unit 103 can convert the audio data received by the RF unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 or stored in the memory 109 into an audio signal and output it as sound when the mobile terminal 100 is in a call signal reception mode, a talk mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, a broadcast reception mode, etc. Moreover, the audio output unit 103 can also provide audio output related to a specific function performed by the mobile terminal 100 (for example, a call signal reception sound, a message reception sound, etc.). The audio output unit 103 may include a speaker, a buzzer, etc.
- the A/V input unit 104 is used to receive audio or video signals.
- the A/V input unit 104 may include a graphics processor (GPU) 1041 and a microphone 1042, and the graphics processor 1041 processes the image data of a static picture or video obtained by an image capture device (such as a camera) in a video capture mode or an image capture mode.
- the processed image frame can be displayed on the display unit 106.
- the image frame processed by the graphics processor 1041 can be stored in the memory 109 (or other storage medium) or sent via the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102.
- the microphone 1042 can receive sound (audio data) via the microphone 1042 in a telephone call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, and other operating modes, and can process such sound into audio data.
- the processed audio (voice) data can be converted into a format output that can be sent to a mobile communication base station via the radio frequency unit 101 in the case of a telephone call mode.
- the microphone 1042 can implement various types of noise elimination (or suppression) algorithms to eliminate (or suppress) noise or interference generated in the process of receiving and sending audio signals.
- the mobile terminal 100 also includes at least one sensor 105, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors.
- the light sensor includes an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor.
- the ambient light sensor can adjust the brightness of the display panel 1061 according to the brightness of the ambient light
- the proximity sensor can turn off the display panel 1061 and/or the backlight when the mobile terminal 100 is moved to the ear.
- the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in all directions (generally three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when stationary.
- sensors such as fingerprint sensors, pressure sensors, iris sensors, molecular sensors, gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, thermometers, infrared sensors, etc.
- the display unit 106 is used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user.
- the display unit 106 may include a display panel 1061, which may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), or the like.
- LCD liquid crystal display
- OLED organic light-emitting diode
- the user input unit 107 can be used to receive input digital or character information and generate information related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal.
- the key signal input of the key may include a touch panel 1071 and other input devices 1072.
- the touch panel 1071 also known as a touch screen, can collect the user's touch operation on or near it (such as the user's operation on the touch panel 1071 or near the touch panel 1071 using any suitable object or accessory such as a finger, stylus, etc.), and drive the corresponding connection device according to a pre-set program.
- the touch panel 1071 may include two parts: a touch detection device and a touch controller.
- the touch detection device detects the user's touch orientation, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device, converts it into the contact point coordinates, and then sends it to the processor 110, and can receive and execute the command sent by the processor 110.
- the touch panel 1071 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared and surface acoustic waves.
- the user input unit 107 may also include other input devices 1072.
- other input devices 1072 may include, but are not limited to, one or more of a physical keyboard, function keys (such as volume control keys, switch keys, etc.), a trackball, a mouse, a joystick, etc., which are not specifically limited here.
- the touch panel 1071 may cover the display panel 1061.
- the touch panel 1071 detects a touch operation on or near it, it is transmitted to the processor 110 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 110 provides a corresponding visual output on the display panel 1061 according to the type of the touch event.
- the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 are used as two independent components to implement the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, in some embodiments, the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 can be integrated to implement the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, which is not limited to the specifics herein.
- the interface unit 108 serves as an interface through which at least one external device can be connected to the mobile terminal 100.
- the external device may include a wired or wireless headset port, an external power supply (or battery charger) port, a wired or wireless data port, a memory card port, a port for connecting a device with an identification module, an audio input/output (I/O) port, a video I/O port, a headphone port, etc.
- the interface unit 108 may be used to receive input (e.g., data information, power, etc.) from an external device and transmit the received input to one or more elements within the mobile terminal 100 or may be used to transmit data between the mobile terminal 100 and an external device.
- the memory 109 can be used to store software programs and various data.
- the memory 109 can mainly include a program storage area and a data storage area.
- the program storage area can store an operating system, an application required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), etc.;
- the data storage area can store data created according to the use of the mobile phone (such as audio data, a phone book, etc.), etc.
- the memory 109 can include a high-speed random access memory, and can also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, a flash memory device, or other volatile solid-state storage devices.
- the processor 110 is the control center of the mobile terminal. It uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile terminal. It executes various functions of the mobile terminal and processes data by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 109, and calling data stored in the memory 109, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole.
- the processor 110 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 110 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor.
- the application processor mainly processes the operating system, user interface, and application programs
- the modem processor mainly processes wireless communications. It is understandable that the above-mentioned modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 110.
- the mobile terminal 100 may also include a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components.
- a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components.
- the power supply 111 may be logically connected to the processor 110 via a power management system, thereby implementing functions such as charging, discharging, and power consumption management through the power management system.
- the mobile terminal 100 may further include a Bluetooth module, etc., which will not be described in detail herein.
- the communication network system is a NR (New Radio) system of universal mobile communication technology.
- the NR system includes UE (User Equipment) 201, E-UTRAN (Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network) 202, EPC (Evolved Packet Core) 203 and the operator's IP service 204, which are connected in sequence.
- UE User Equipment
- E-UTRAN Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network
- EPC Evolved Packet Core
- UE201 may be the above-mentioned terminal device 100, which will not be described in detail here.
- E-UTRAN 202 includes eNodeB 2021 and other eNodeBs 2022 , etc.
- eNodeB 2021 may be connected to other eNodeBs 2022 via a backhaul (eg, an X2 interface), and eNodeB 2021 is connected to EPC 203 , and eNodeB 2021 may provide UE 201 with access to EPC 203 .
- a backhaul eg, an X2 interface
- EPC203 may include MME (Mobility Management Entity) 2031, HSS (Home Subscriber Server) 2032, other MMEs 2033, SGW (Serving Gate Way) 2034, PGW (PDN Gate Way) 2035 and PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function) 2036.
- MME 2031 is a control node that processes signaling between UE 201 and EPC 203, providing bearer and connection management.
- HSS 2032 is used to provide some registers to manage functions such as home location register (not shown in the figure), and save some user-specific information such as service features and data rates. All user data can be sent through SGW2034.
- PGW2035 can provide IP address allocation and other functions for UE 201.
- PCRF2036 is the policy and charging control policy decision point for service data flow and IP bearer resources. It selects and provides available policy and charging control decisions for the policy and charging execution functional unit (not shown in the figure).
- IP service 204 may include the Internet, intranet, IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) or other IP services.
- IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem
- Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a controller 140 provided in the present application.
- the controller 140 includes: a memory 1401 and a processor 1402, the memory 1401 is used to store program instructions, and the processor 1402 is used to call the program instructions in the memory 1401 to execute the steps performed by the controller in the first embodiment of the above method, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
- the controller further includes a communication interface 1403, which can be connected to the processor 1402 via a bus 1404.
- the processor 1402 can control the communication interface 1403 to implement the receiving and sending functions of the controller 140.
- Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a network node 150 provided by the present application.
- the network node 150 includes: a memory 1501 and a processor 1502, the memory 1501 is used to store program instructions, and the processor 1502 is used to call the program instructions in the memory 1501 to execute the steps performed by the first node in the first embodiment of the above method, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
- the controller further includes a communication interface 1503, which can be connected to the processor 1502 via a bus 1504.
- the processor 1502 can control the communication interface 1503 to implement the receiving and sending functions of the network node 150.
- the above-mentioned integrated module implemented in the form of a software function module can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- the above-mentioned software function module is stored in a storage medium, including a number of instructions for enabling a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (English: processor) to perform some steps of the methods of various embodiments of the present application.
- all or part of the embodiments may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
- all or part of the embodiments may be implemented in the form of a computer program product.
- the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
- the computer program instructions When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the process or function according to the embodiments of the present application is generated in whole or in part.
- the computer may be a general-purpose computer.
- Computer instructions can be stored in a storage medium or transmitted from one storage medium to another storage medium.
- computer instructions can be transmitted from one website, computer, server, or data center to another website, computer, server, or data center by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
- the storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that includes one or more available media integrated.
- the available medium can be a magnetic medium (e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (e.g., a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., a solid state disk, SSD), etc.
- control method can be applied to a terminal device (such as a mobile phone), and includes the following steps:
- S4 Perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device can perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information.
- the first downlink information is sent by the network device to the terminal device, and the downlink synchronization information can be acquired or obtained by the terminal device based on the second downlink information sent by the network device.
- the first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel order (PDCCH order, Physical Downlink Control Channel order) and/or a cell switching command.
- PDCCH order Physical Downlink Control Channel order
- a cell switching command a physical downlink control channel order (PDCCH order, Physical Downlink Control Channel order) and/or a cell switching command.
- the candidate cell indicated by the first downlink information can be called a target cell.
- the downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance-to-reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field.
- the second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control element (MAC CE, Media Access Control Control Element), downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI,) and a downlink signal.
- MAC CE medium access control layer control element
- DCI Downlink Control Information
- the terminal device reports to the network device the capability value of storing downlink synchronization information of candidate cells, i.e., the maximum number of candidate cells for which the terminal device stores downlink synchronization information of candidate cells, and measures downlink signals of the candidate cells, and then reports the measurement results to the network device.
- the capability value of storing downlink synchronization information of candidate cells i.e., the maximum number of candidate cells for which the terminal device stores downlink synchronization information of candidate cells, and measures downlink signals of the candidate cells, and then reports the measurement results to the network device.
- the network device selects or determines a candidate cell, and indicates to the terminal device through MAC CE the candidate cell that needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the MAC CE and obtains or acquires downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
- the terminal device measures the downlink signal of the candidate cell and reports the measurement result to the network device.
- the network device selects or determines a candidate cell, and indicates to the terminal device the candidate cell that needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or acquire downlink synchronization information by adding a candidate cell identifier in the DCI.
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the DCI and acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
- the terminal device acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information corresponding to a candidate cell whose measurement results meet preset conditions.
- meeting the preset conditions includes that the offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the measurement result of the source cell, and/or the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value.
- the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on preset rules and according to the time unit of the reference cell.
- the reference cell includes at least one of the source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of the cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by the network device.
- the preset rule includes at least one of the following:
- the number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field
- the number of symbols contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field
- the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the sampling interval number field and/or the sampling interval number factor.
- the terminal device may acquire or obtain the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the time unit boundary of the reference cell and the timing relationship of the candidate cell, or may determine the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell.
- the terminal device may also save, update or clear the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
- the downlink synchronization information saved by the terminal device is usually time-sensitive. If the terminal device detects or receives a synchronization broadcast block of a candidate cell, the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be saved based on the synchronization broadcast block. If the terminal device detects or receives a new synchronization broadcast block, the old downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be cleared, and the latest downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be saved based on the latest synchronization broadcast block. The terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the latest downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device if the downlink synchronization information saved by the terminal device exceeds the validity duration of the downlink synchronization information, it means that the saved downlink synchronization information is invalid, and the terminal device cannot perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information.
- the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be cleared.
- the terminal device may clear the downlink synchronization information of other candidate cells except the candidate cell corresponding to the indication information.
- the terminal device can clear the downlink synchronization information of the corresponding candidate cell.
- This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by performing downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information, so that the terminal device can obtain or get the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell before receiving the cell switching command, and perform downlink synchronization operations in combination with the first downlink information, thereby reducing the waiting time after receiving the cell switching command, thereby reducing the delay in the cell switching process.
- control method further includes the following steps:
- S3 Acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
- the second downlink information includes at least one of MAC CE, DCI and a downlink signal.
- the terminal device reports to the network device the capability value of the terminal device to save the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cells, that is, the maximum number of candidate cells for which the terminal device can save the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cells, and/or the terminal device measures the downlink signals of the candidate cells, such as: synchronization broadcast block (Synchronization Signal and PBCH block, SS/PBCH block) or channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI-RS), and reports the measurement results (such as SSBRI/CRI and/or L1-RSRP) to the network device.
- the network device selects the candidate cells and indicates to the terminal device through MAC CE the candidate cells that need to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information.
- the network device selects a candidate cell based on the measurement results of the candidate cell (e.g., SSBRI/CRI and/or L1-RSRP), for example: selecting a candidate cell based on the size of the L1-RSRP of the candidate cell, and selecting a candidate cell with a larger L1-RSRP according to the ability value of the terminal device to save the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
- the candidate cell e.g., SSBRI/CRI and/or L1-RSRP
- the network device selects the target cell based on the measurement results of the candidate cells (eg, SSBRI/CRI and/or L1-RSRP), for example, the target cell is selected based on the size of the L1-RSRP of the candidate cells, and the candidate cell with the largest L1-RSRP is the target cell.
- the candidate cells eg, SSBRI/CRI and/or L1-RSRP
- the number of candidate cells indicated by the MAC CE does not exceed the number of candidate cells indicated by the capability value of the terminal device for storing downlink synchronization information of the candidate cells.
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cells indicated in the MAC CE and obtains or acquires the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cells.
- FIG. 7 is a first example schematic diagram of a control method according to the second embodiment.
- the candidate cell indication MAC CE can indicate a maximum of N candidate cells, where N is an integer.
- the candidate cell indication MAC CE contains one eight-bit byte (i.e., octet); if N is greater than 8 and less than or equal to 16, the candidate cell indication MAC CE contains two eight-bit bytes, and so on.
- the Ci field is used to indicate whether the candidate cell i needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
- Ci field indicates that the terminal device needs to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell i and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell i, and/or, if the Ci field is set to 0, it indicates that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell i and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell i or clear the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell i.
- R is a reserved bit, which is set to 0.
- an additional physical cell identifier may be defined in all candidate cells configured by the to-be-added and modified L1/L2 candidate list information element (e.g., Candidates-L1L2-ToAddModList-r18), indicating that the additional physical cell identifier parameter (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) is uniformly numbered in all candidate cells configured by the to-be-added and modified L1/L2 candidate list information element, and all candidate cells configured by the to-be-added and modified L1/L2 candidate list information element refer to the to-be-added and modified L1/L2 candidate list information element configuration.
- the additional physical cell identifier parameter e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18
- the candidate cells configured by all L1/L2 candidate information elements to be added and modified (for example: Candidates-L1L2-ToAddMod-r18), that is, the candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters (for example: candidates-L1L2-CellsConfig-r18) contained in all L1/L2 candidate information elements to be added and modified.
- the type of the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters is a cell group configuration information element (for example: CellGroupConfig).
- the candidate cells include special cells and/or secondary cells.
- the configuration of additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) of the candidate cell includes adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig) information element, and/or adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the secondary cell configuration (e.g., SCellConfig) information element to indicate the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell; it may also include adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element to indicate the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell.
- additional physical cell identification parameters e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18
- the special cell configuration e.g., SpCellConfig
- SCellConfig secondary cell configuration
- the Ci field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE is used to indicate whether the candidate cell i with the additional physical cell identifier i needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information. If the Ci field is set to 1, it means that the terminal device needs to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell i and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information, and/or, if the Ci field is set to 0, it means that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell i and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell i or clear the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell i.
- the value of the additional physical cell identity parameter (eg, additionalPCIIndex-r18) included in the special cell configuration information element or the secondary cell configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell i is i.
- the value of the additional physical cell identifier parameter (for example, additionalPCIIndex-r18) included in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell i is i.
- an additional physical cell identifier may be defined in all candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified, indicating that the additional physical cell identifier parameter (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) is numbered in all candidate cells configured by the current L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified.
- All candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified refer to all candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters (e.g., candidates-L1L2-CellsConfig-r18) contained in the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified.
- the type of the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters is a cell group configuration information element (e.g., CellGroupConfig).
- the candidate cells include special cells and/or secondary cells.
- the configuration of additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) of the candidate cell includes adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig) information element, and/or adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the secondary cell configuration (e.g., SCellConfig) information element to indicate the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell; and also includes adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element to indicate the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell.
- additional physical cell identification parameters e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18
- the special cell configuration e.g., SpCellConfig
- SCellConfig secondary cell configuration
- the candidate cell indication MAC CE may indicate candidate cells configured with up to M L1/L2 candidate information elements to be added and modified, optionally, the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified configures up to M L1/L2 candidate information elements to be added and modified and each L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified configures up to N candidate cells, optionally, M and N are integers.
- the Gi field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE is used to indicate whether the candidate cell configured by the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified with the value i of the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (for example: candidates-L1L2-Id-r18) needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
- the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter for example: candidates-L1L2-Id-r18
- the Gi domain means that at least one candidate cell among the candidate cells configured with the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified and whose value is i of the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (for example, candidates-L1L2-Id-r18) needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information, and/or, if the Gi domain is set to 0, it means that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information for the candidate cell configured with the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (for example, candidates-L1L2-Id-r18) and whose value is i of the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified, or to clear the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell configured with the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified and whose value is i of the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (for example, candidates-L1L2-Id-r18).
- the Cj field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE is used to indicate whether the candidate cell j with the additional physical cell identifier j needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information. If the Cj field is set to 1, it means that the terminal device needs to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell j and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information, and/or, if the Cj field is set to 0, it means that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell j and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell j or clear the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell j.
- the value of the additional physical cell identity parameter (for example, additionalPCIIndex-r18) included in the special cell configuration information element or the secondary cell configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell j is j.
- the value of the additional physical cell identifier parameter (for example, additionalPCIIndex-r18) included in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell j is j.
- FIG8 is a second example schematic diagram of a control method according to the second embodiment.
- each Gi field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE corresponds to N Cj fields, and the Gi fields uniformly occupy the first octet of the candidate cell indication MAC CE.
- M is greater than 8
- the Gi field continues to occupy the second octet of the candidate cell indication MAC CE, and so on.
- N is greater than 8
- the N Cj fields corresponding to each Gi field continue to occupy the second octet of the candidate cell indication MAC CE, and so on.
- the N Cj fields of the second octet correspond to the G1 field
- the N Cj fields of the third octet correspond to the G2 field.
- FIG. 9 is a third example schematic diagram of the control method according to the second embodiment.
- each Gi field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE occupies the first position of each octet, and each Gi field and the corresponding N Cj fields occupy one octet of the candidate cell indication MAC CE. If (N+1) is greater than 8, each Gi field and the corresponding N Cj fields continue to occupy the second octet of the candidate cell indication MAC CE, and so on.
- the N Cj fields of the first octet correspond to the G1 field
- the N Cj fields of the second octet correspond to the G2 field.
- the terminal device needs to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell j and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information; and/or, if the Cj domain is set to 0, that is, including the two cases that the Gi domain is set to 1 and the corresponding Cj domain is set to 0 and the Gi domain is set to 0 and the corresponding Cj domain is also set to 0, it means that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell j and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information or clear the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell j.
- R is a reserved bit and is set to 0.
- Figure 10 is a fourth example schematic diagram of the control method shown in the second embodiment.
- there are M Gi fields in the candidate cell indication MAC CE and the Gi fields uniformly occupy the first eight-bit byte of the candidate cell indication MAC CE. If M is greater than 8, the Gi field continues to occupy the second eight-bit byte of the candidate cell indication MAC CE, and so on.
- There are N Cj fields in the candidate cell indication MAC CE and the Cj fields uniformly occupy the second eight-bit byte of the candidate cell indication MAC CE. If N is greater than 8, the Cj field continues to occupy the second eight-bit byte of the candidate cell indication MAC CE, and so on.
- the Cj field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE corresponds to the Gi field. If the Gi field is set to 1 and the Cj field is set to 1, it means that in the candidate cell configured with the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified and the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (for example: candidates-L1L2-Id-r18) is i, the terminal device needs to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell j and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information; and/or, if the Cj field is set to 0, it means that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell j and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information or clear the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell j.
- R is a reserved bit and can be set to 0.
- the terminal device can also measure the downlink signal of the candidate cell and report the measurement results to the network device so that the network device can select or determine the candidate cell, and indicate to the terminal device the candidate cell that needs to be downlink synchronized and obtain or get downlink synchronization information by adding a candidate cell identifier in the DCI.
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the DCI and obtains or gets the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
- This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by the terminal device reporting the ability value of the terminal device to save the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell to the network device, so that the network device indicates the candidate cell for downlink synchronization through the media access control layer control unit, so that the terminal device can determine the candidate cell, and then perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information.
- Figure 11 is a flow chart of the control method shown according to the third embodiment. Based on any of the above embodiments of the present application, this embodiment discloses a specific method for indicating to a terminal device through DCI that a candidate cell needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device measures the downlink signal of the candidate cell, such as the synchronization broadcast block (e.g., SS/PBCH block) or the channel state information reference signal (e.g., CSI-RS), and reports the measurement result (e.g., SSBRI/CRI and/or L1-RSRP) to the network device.
- the network device selects the candidate cell and indicates to the terminal device the candidate cell that needs to be downlink synchronized and obtain or get downlink synchronization information by adding the candidate cell identifier in the DCI (e.g., DCI format 1_0).
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the downlink control information and obtains or gets the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
- the downlink control information is used for the random access process initiated by the PDCCH order.
- the terminal device obtains the physical downlink control channel command by the candidate cell identifier in the downlink control information to trigger it to perform physical random access channel (PRACH, Physical Random Access Channel) transmission to the candidate cell, thereby achieving uplink synchronization.
- PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
- an additional physical cell identifier may be defined in all candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified, indicating that the additional physical cell identifier parameter (for example: additionalPCIIndex-r18) is uniformly numbered in all candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified.
- All candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified refer to candidate cells configured by all L1/L2 candidate information elements to be added and modified configured by the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified, that is, candidate cells configured by L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters contained in all L1/L2 candidate information elements to be added and modified.
- the type of the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameter is a cell group configuration information element.
- the candidate cells include special cells and/or secondary cells.
- an additional physical cell identification field is added to the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0), or a reserved bit in the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0) is used as an additional physical cell identification field, and the terminal device selects or determines an additional physical cell identification of a candidate cell according to the value of the additional physical cell identification field, and performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtains or obtains the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device after saving or updating the downlink synchronization information, performs physical random access channel transmission to the candidate cell according to the physical downlink control channel command indication information, thereby achieving uplink synchronization.
- an additional physical cell identifier field is added to the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0), or the reserved bits in the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0) are used as the additional physical cell identifier field, and the terminal device selects or determines an additional physical cell identifier of a candidate cell according to the value of the additional physical cell identifier field, and selects or determines a candidate cell from the candidate cells configured in the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified according to the additional physical cell identifier of the candidate cell.
- the configuration of additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) of the candidate cell includes adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig) information element, and/or adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the secondary cell configuration (e.g., SCellConfig) information element to indicate the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell; it may also include adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element to indicate the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell.
- additional physical cell identification parameters e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18
- the special cell configuration e.g., SpCellConfig
- SCellConfig secondary cell configuration
- the terminal device selects or determines an additional physical cell identifier of a candidate cell based on the value of the additional physical cell identifier field in the downlink control information (for example: DCI format 1_0), selects or determines a candidate cell from the candidate cells configured in the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified based on the additional physical cell identifier of the candidate cell, performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtains or gets the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
- the downlink control information for example: DCI format 1_0
- the value of the additional physical cell identifier field in the downlink control information is equal to the value of the additional physical cell identifier parameter (for example, additionalPCIIndex-r18) contained in the special cell configuration information element or the secondary cell configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell;
- the value of the additional physical cell identifier field in the downlink control information (eg, DCI format 1_0) is equal to the value of the additional physical cell identifier parameter (eg, additionalPCIIndex-r18) included in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell.
- the terminal device after saving or updating the downlink synchronization information, performs physical random access channel transmission to the candidate cell according to the physical downlink control channel command indication information, thereby achieving uplink synchronization.
- a downlink synchronization determination field is added to the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0), or a reserved bit in the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0) is used as the downlink synchronization determination field.
- the bit width of the downlink synchronization determination field obtained by these two methods is 1 bit, and the downlink synchronization determination field is used to indicate whether the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtains or obtains the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
- this field indicates that it is necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtain or obtain the corresponding downlink synchronization information, and/or, if the value of this field is 0, it indicates that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtain or obtain the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
- an additional physical cell identifier may be defined in all candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified, indicating that the additional physical cell identifier parameter (for example, additionalPCIIndex-r18) is numbered in all candidate cells configured by the current L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified.
- All candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified refer to all candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters (for example, candidates-L1L2-CellsConfig-r18) contained in the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified.
- the type of the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters is a cell group configuration information element.
- the candidate cells include special cells and/or secondary cells.
- an L1/L2 candidate index value field is added to the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0), or the reserved bits in the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0) are used as the L1/L2 candidate index value field, and the terminal device selects or determines an L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified from the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified according to the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value field, that is, the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value field is the same as the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (e.g., candidates-L1L2-Id-r18) of the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified.
- the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter e.g., candidates-L1L2-Id-r18
- an additional physical cell identification field is added to the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0), or a reserved bit in the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0) is used as an additional physical cell identification field.
- the terminal device selects or determines an additional physical cell identification of a candidate cell according to the value of the additional physical cell identification field, and selects or determines a candidate cell from all candidate cells configured with the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified corresponding to the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value field according to the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell.
- additionalPCIIndex-r18 For the configuration of the additional physical cell identification parameters of the candidate cell (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18):
- an additional physical cell identifier parameter (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) is added to a special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig) information element and/or an additional physical cell identifier parameter (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) is added to a secondary cell configuration (e.g., SCellConfig) information element to indicate an additional physical cell identifier of the candidate cell;
- a special cell configuration e.g., SpCellConfig
- an additional physical cell identifier parameter e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18
- SCellConfig secondary cell configuration
- an additional physical cell identifier parameter (eg, additionalPCIIndex-r18) is added to the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element to indicate an additional physical cell identifier of the candidate cell.
- the terminal device selects or determines the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified according to the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value field, selects or determines the additional physical cell identifier of a candidate cell according to the value of the additional physical cell identifier field in the downlink control information (for example: DCI format 1_0), selects or determines a candidate cell from the candidate cells configured in the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified according to the additional physical cell identifier of the candidate cell, performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtains or obtains the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
- the downlink control information for example: DCI format 1_0
- the value of the additional physical cell identifier field in the downlink control information is equal to the value of the additional physical cell identifier parameter (for example, additionalPCIIndex-r18) contained in the special cell configuration information element or the secondary cell configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell;
- the value of the additional physical cell identifier field in the downlink control information (eg, DCI format 1_0) is equal to the value of the additional physical cell identifier parameter (eg, additionalPCIIndex-r18) included in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell.
- the terminal device after saving or updating the downlink synchronization information, performs physical random access channel transmission to the candidate cell according to the physical downlink control channel command indication information, thereby achieving uplink synchronization.
- a downlink synchronization determination field is added to the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0), or a reserved bit in the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0) is used as the downlink synchronization determination field.
- the bit width of the downlink synchronization determination field obtained by these two methods is 1 bit, and the downlink synchronization determination field is used to indicate whether the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtains or obtains the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
- this field indicates that it is necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtain or obtain the corresponding downlink synchronization information, and/or, if the value of this field is 0, it indicates that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtain or obtain the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
- This embodiment uses the above scheme, specifically by measuring the downlink signal of the candidate cell through the terminal device, and reporting the measurement result to the network device, so that the network device indicates the candidate cell for downlink synchronization through downlink control information, so that the terminal device can determine the candidate cell, and then perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information.
- Figure 12 is a flow chart of a control method according to the fourth embodiment. Based on any of the above embodiments of the present application, this embodiment discloses a specific method for a terminal device to determine a candidate cell for acquiring or obtaining downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device determines the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, and obtains or acquires the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions.
- satisfying the preset condition includes: an offset value of a measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a measurement result of the source cell, and/or the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value.
- the terminal device measures the downlink signal of the candidate cell, such as the synchronization broadcast block (e.g., SS/PBCH block) or the channel state information reference signal (e.g., CSI-RS), and reports the measurement results of the candidate cell that meets the preset conditions (e.g., SSBRI/CRI, L1-RSRP, L1-SINR) to the network device, and obtains or gets the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
- the synchronization broadcast block e.g., SS/PBCH block
- the channel state information reference signal e.g., CSI-RS
- the preset condition is met when the offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell (e.g., L1-RSRP, L1-SINR) is better than the measurement result of the source cell, for example: (Measurement candidate cell i— offset ⁇ Measurement source cell ), and optionally, the offset value may be an RRC configuration value or a default value.
- the terminal device reports the measurement result of the candidate cell i (e.g., SSBRI/CRI, L1-RSRP, L1-SINR), and obtains or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell i.
- the preset condition is met when the measurement result of the candidate cell (e.g., L1-RSRP, L1-SINR) is higher than a preset threshold, for example: (Measurement candidate cell i ⁇ Threshold), and optionally, the preset threshold may be an RRC configuration or a default value.
- a preset threshold for example: (Measurement candidate cell i ⁇ Threshold)
- the terminal device reports the measurement result of the candidate cell i (e.g., SSBRI/CRI, L1-RSRP, L1-SINR), and obtains or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell i.
- the terminal device arranges the candidate cells of these preset conditions in a preset manner, and reports the measurement results of the first N candidate cells (e.g., SSBRI/CRI, L1-RSRP, L1-SINR) to the network device, and obtains or gets the downlink synchronization information of these N candidate cells.
- the preset manner may be to arrange the candidate cells according to the size of the L1 measurement results (e.g., L1-RSRP, L1-SINR).
- This embodiment adopts the above-mentioned scheme, specifically, the terminal device determines the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, obtains or obtains the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions, and provides a scheme for the terminal device to determine the candidate cell for obtaining or obtaining the downlink synchronization information, so that the terminal device can perform downlink synchronization based on the determined candidate cell and obtain or obtain the downlink synchronization information.
- FIG. 13 is a flow chart of a control method according to the fifth embodiment, showing that the specific steps of step S3 include at least one of the following:
- S31 Select or determine a candidate cell according to the medium access control layer control unit indicated by the candidate cell and/or the downlink control information, and acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
- the terminal device determines a candidate cell to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and acquire or obtain corresponding downlink synchronization information.
- the Ci field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE is set to 1, it means that the candidate cell i needs to be synchronized downlink and acquired or Get the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell i.
- the Gi field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE is set to 1 and the Cj field corresponding to the Gi field is set to 1, downlink synchronization is performed on the candidate cell j and the corresponding downlink synchronization information is acquired or obtained.
- the Gi field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE is set to 1 and the Cj field is set to 1, downlink synchronization is performed on the candidate cell j and the corresponding downlink synchronization information is acquired or obtained.
- a candidate cell is selected or determined according to the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value field and/or the additional physical cell identification field in the downlink control information, and downlink synchronization is performed on the candidate cell and corresponding downlink synchronization information is acquired or obtained.
- S32 Determine the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, and obtain or acquire the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset condition.
- the terminal device reports the measurement result of the candidate cell, and acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
- satisfying the preset condition includes: an offset value of a measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a measurement result of the source cell, and/or the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value.
- acquiring or obtaining downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes: acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to a time unit of a reference cell based on a preset rule.
- the reference cell includes at least one of a source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of a cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by the network device.
- the preset rule includes at least one of the following:
- the number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field
- the number of symbols contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field
- the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the sampling interval number field and/or the sampling interval number factor.
- the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell is acquired or obtained based on the time unit boundary of the reference cell and the timing relationship of the candidate cell, and the number of time units is used to indicate the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
- the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes at least one of the following fields: a candidate cell identification field, an advance-to-reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field.
- the terminal device determines the frame boundary of the candidate cell based on the value of at least one of the above fields.
- the number of subframes included in the time difference between frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the subframe number field.
- the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell in addition to the number of subframes indicated by the value of the subframe number field, includes a number of time slots determined by the value of the time slot number field.
- the number of time slots included in the time difference between frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field.
- the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell in addition to the number of subframes indicated by the value of the subframe number field and the number of time slots indicated by the value of the time slot number field, includes the number of symbols determined by the value of the symbol number field.
- the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell in addition to the number of time slots indicated by the value of the time slot number field, includes a number of symbols determined by the value of the symbol number field.
- the number of symbols included in the time difference between frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field.
- the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is M ⁇ K ⁇ TC or M ⁇ K ⁇ TS .
- the timing relationship of the candidate cell is determined by the timing relationship of the reference cell, and the time unit boundary of the candidate cell is aligned with the time unit boundary corresponding to the reference cell.
- the timing relationship of the candidate cell is determined by the timing relationship of the reference cell.
- the time unit boundary of the candidate cell is aligned with the time unit boundary corresponding to the reference cell.
- the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell based on the timing relationship of the reference cell, and the terminal device detects or receives the synchronization broadcast block, and determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell based on the detected or received synchronization broadcast block and the corresponding synchronization broadcast block index value.
- the terminal device when it receives indication information from the network device, it selects or determines the candidate cell based on the indication information, and then determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell based on the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell and the timing relationship of the reference cell, that is, determines the time unit (for example: frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell.
- the time unit for example: frame, subframe, time slot
- the indication information may be a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command.
- This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by selecting or determining a candidate cell according to the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit and/or downlink control information, and acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell; determining the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions, determining the candidate cell through at least one of the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and downlink signal, and acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, so that the terminal device can determine the candidate cell whose downlink synchronization information needs to be acquired or obtained before receiving the cell switching command, and perform the downlink synchronization operation based on the first downlink information, thereby reducing the waiting time after receiving the cell switching command, thereby reducing the delay in the cell switching process.
- this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the synchronization broadcast block of the candidate cell.
- the terminal device detects and/or receives the synchronization broadcast block of the candidate cell to determine the timing relationship of the candidate cell, that is, determines the boundary of the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) of the candidate cell.
- the time unit e.g., frame, subframe, time slot
- the terminal device may acquire or obtain the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to the time unit boundary of the reference cell and the timing relationship of the candidate cell.
- the reference cell may be selected or determined through intra-frequency candidate cells, or may be selected or determined through inter-frequency candidate cells.
- the source cell is considered to be on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell, and the candidate cell is also referred to as a candidate cell within the frequency.
- the reference cell is the source cell, that is, the current serving cell.
- the reference cell is the source cell, that is, the current serving cell.
- the reference cell and the candidate cell are on the same frequency carrier and are detected cells, that is, cells that have completed synchronization.
- the reference cell is a special cell of the cell group corresponding to the candidate cell.
- the reference cell is a main cell group (e.g., MCG)
- the reference cell is a main cell (e.g., PCell);
- the cell group corresponding to the candidate cell is a secondary cell group (e.g., SCG)
- the reference cell is a main secondary cell (e.g., PSCell).
- the reference cell is configured by a network device.
- a reference cell index value field is added to the RRC, or the SSB index value field is obtained from the serving cell (for example, deriveSSB-IndexFromCellInter-r17) using the NR measurement object information element (for example, MeasObjectNR).
- the terminal device obtains the reference cell based on at least one of the above fields.
- the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell including at least one of the following fields: candidate cell identification field, advance reference cell determination field, intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, subframe number field, time slot number field, symbol number field and sampling interval number field.
- the candidate cell identification field includes at least one of the following: a serving cell index value of a special cell (e.g., servCellIndex), a secondary cell index value of a secondary cell (e.g., sCellIndex), a physical cell identifier (e.g., PCI), a layer 1/layer 2 candidate index value, and an additional physical cell identifier.
- a serving cell index value of a special cell e.g., servCellIndex
- a secondary cell index value of a secondary cell e.g., sCellIndex
- a physical cell identifier e.g., PCI
- a layer 1/layer 2 candidate index value e.g., a layer 1/layer 2 candidate index value
- the decision field ahead of the reference cell is 1 bit. If the decision field ahead of the reference cell takes a value of 1 or is enabled, it indicates that the candidate cell time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot, symbol) is ahead of the time unit with the same number of the reference cell, for example, a frame of the candidate cell is ahead of the frame with the same number of the reference cell; and/or, if the decision field ahead of the reference cell takes a value of 0 or is not enabled, it indicates that the candidate cell time unit lags behind the time unit with the same number of the reference cell, for example, a frame of the candidate cell lags behind the frame with the same number of the reference cell.
- the candidate cell time unit e.g., frame, subframe, time slot, symbol
- the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain is 1 bit. If the value of the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain is 1 or enabled, it indicates that the candidate cell is an intra-frequency candidate cell, and the candidate cell and the reference cell are on the same frequency carrier; and/or, if the value of the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain is 0 or not enabled, it indicates that the candidate cell is an inter-frequency candidate cell, and the candidate cell and the reference cell are not on the same frequency carrier.
- the subframe number field is X bits
- X is an integer, indicating the number of subframes (e.g., subframes) included in the time difference between the frames (e.g., frame) with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell, for example: the subframe number field has 2 bits, and the subframe number field value is 0/1/2/3, indicating that the number of subframes is 0/1/2/3 respectively.
- the number of subframes included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the subframe number field, for example: if the value of the subframe number field is 1, it indicates that the number of subframes included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is 1.
- the time slot number field is Y bits, where Y is an integer, representing the number of time slots (e.g., slots) included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell.
- Y is an integer, representing the number of time slots (e.g., slots) included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell.
- the time slot number field has 2 bits, and the values of the time slot number field are 0/1/2/3, respectively indicating that the number of time slots is 0/1/2/3.
- the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell, in addition to the number of subframes indicated by the value of the subframe number field includes a number of time slots determined by the value of the time slot number field.
- Figure 14 is a first example schematic diagram of a control method according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in Figure 14, if the value of the time slot number field is 1, it means that the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell, in addition to the number of subframes indicated by the value of the subframe number field, includes 1 time slot.
- the number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field.
- Figure 15 is a second example schematic diagram of a control method according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in Figure 15, if the value of the time slot number field is 1, it means that the number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is 1.
- the symbol number field is Z bits, where Z is an integer, indicating the number of symbols (e.g., symbol) contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell.
- the symbol number field has 2 bits, and the symbol number field value is 0/1/2/3, indicating that the number of symbols is 0/1/2/3, respectively.
- the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell in addition to the number of subframes indicated by the value of the subframe number field and the number of time slots indicated by the value of the time slot number field, contains the number of symbols determined by the value of the symbol number field.
- Z is an integer, indicating the number of symbols (e.g., symbol) contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell.
- the symbol number field has 2 bits, and the symbol number field value is 0/1/2/3, indicating that the number of symbols is 0/1/2/3, respectively.
- the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell, in addition to the number of time slots indicated by the value of the time slot number field includes the number of symbols determined by the value of the symbol number field. For example, if the value of the symbol number field is 1, it indicates that the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell, in addition to the number of time slots indicated by the value of the time slot number field, includes 1 symbol. Please refer to Figure 15 for details.
- the number of symbols included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field.
- Figure 16 is a third example schematic diagram of a control method according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in Figure 16, if the value of the symbol number field is 1, it means that the number of symbols included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is 1.
- the sampling interval number field is L bits, L is an integer, and is used to indicate the number of sampling intervals (e.g., Ts or Tc) included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell.
- the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is M ⁇ K ⁇ TC or M ⁇ K ⁇ TS , where M is the value of the sampling interval number field, and K is the sampling interval. Sampling interval number factor.
- M the value of the sampling interval number field
- K the sampling interval number field
- M the value of the sampling interval number field
- M the value of the sampling interval number field
- K is the sampling interval. Sampling interval number factor.
- M of the sampling interval number field for example: the sampling interval number field has 2 bits, and the sampling interval number field value is 0/1/2/3, which respectively indicates that the value of M is 0/1/2/3.
- the value of the sampling interval number factor K can be determined by at least one of the following methods: the value of K is configured by the network device through RRC/MAC CE/DCI signaling, the value of K is a default value, the value of K is a default value and is related to the subcarrier spacing, and the value of K is a value determined according to the terminal device capability; optionally, the value of K is 1, indicating that the number of sampling intervals contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is M ⁇ TC or M ⁇ TS , that is, the sampling interval number is directly determined by the value of the sampling interval number field.
- FIG17 is a schematic diagram of a fourth example of a control method according to the seventh embodiment.
- the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is M ⁇ 16TC or M ⁇ 16TS .
- M the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is 32TC or 32TS .
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell according to the received indication information, that is: the terminal device determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell according to the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell and the timing relationship of the reference cell (for example: the boundary of the time unit (frame, subframe, time slot)), thereby performing downlink synchronization on the candidate cell.
- the timing relationship of the candidate cell is obtained from the timing relationship of the reference cell (for example: the boundary of the time unit (frame, subframe, time slot)) according to the value of at least one of the following fields: candidate cell identification field, value of the decision field ahead of the reference cell, value of the decision field within the frequency candidate cell, subframe number field, time slot number field, symbol number field and sampling interval number field.
- the value of the decision field ahead of the reference cell is 0, the value of the decision field within the frequency candidate cell is 1, and the value of the symbol number field is 3, indicating that for frames with the same number, the candidate cell lags behind the reference cell by 3 symbols.
- This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by obtaining or getting the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to the time unit boundary of the reference cell and the timing relationship of the candidate cell, so that the terminal device uses as little bit information as possible when obtaining or getting the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, thereby reducing the overhead of the terminal device; and/or using limited downlink synchronization information to perform more accurate downlink synchronization of the candidate cell.
- this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
- the terminal device may also determine the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell.
- the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell including at least one of the following fields: candidate cell identification field, advance reference cell determination field, intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, subframe number field, time slot number field, symbol number field and sampling interval number field.
- the candidate cell identification field includes at least one of the following: a serving cell index value of a special cell (e.g., servCellIndex), a secondary cell index value of a secondary cell (e.g., sCellIndex), a physical cell identifier (e.g., PCI), a layer 1/layer 2 candidate index value, and an additional physical cell identifier.
- a serving cell index value of a special cell e.g., servCellIndex
- a secondary cell index value of a secondary cell e.g., sCellIndex
- a physical cell identifier e.g., PCI
- a layer 1/layer 2 candidate index value e.g., a layer 1/layer 2 candidate index value
- the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain is 1 bit. If the value of the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain is 1 or enabled, it indicates that the candidate cell is an intra-frequency candidate cell, and the candidate cell and the reference cell are on the same frequency carrier; and/or, if the value of the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain is 0 or not enabled, it indicates that the candidate cell is an inter-frequency candidate cell, and the candidate cell and the reference cell are not on the same frequency carrier.
- the timing relationship (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) of the candidate cell is determined by the timing relationship of the reference cell.
- the boundary of the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) of the candidate cell is aligned with the boundary of the time unit corresponding to the reference cell, that is, the boundaries of the time units with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell are aligned.
- the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell, the terminal device detects/receives the synchronization broadcast block, determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell according to the detected/received synchronization broadcast block and the corresponding synchronization broadcast block index value, that is, determines the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell, and the terminal device maintains the downlink timing relationship of the candidate cell, that is, maintains the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell.
- the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell
- the terminal device detects/receives the synchronization broadcast block
- determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell according to the detected/received synchronization broadcast block and the corresponding synchronization broadcast block index value that is, determines the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary
- a domain for obtaining the synchronization broadcast block index value from the serving cell is added to the RRC, or the SSB index value domain (e.g., deriveSSB-IndexFromCell) is used to obtain the SSB index value from the serving cell in the NR measurement object information element (e.g., MeasObjectNR).
- the NR measurement object information element e.g., MeasObjectNR.
- At least one of the above domains is used to indicate whether the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell.
- the above domain is enabled, it indicates that the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell.
- the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell based on the timing relationship of the reference cell.
- the terminal device detects/receives the synchronization broadcast block, and determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell based on the detected/received synchronization broadcast block and the corresponding synchronization broadcast block index value, that is, determines the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell.
- the time unit e.g., frame, subframe, time slot
- the number of time units included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell determined by the terminal device is determined by the value of at least one time unit number field, for example: the number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field, for another example: the number of symbols included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field, for another example: the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is M ⁇ K ⁇ TC or M ⁇ K ⁇ TS , where M is the value of the sampling interval number field, K is the sampling interval number factor, and for the sampling interval number factor K, the value of the sampling interval number factor K can be determined by at least one of the following methods: the value of K is determined by the network device through RRC/MAC CE/DCI signaling configuration, the value of K is a default value, the value
- the RRC adds a synchronized broadcast block index value field obtained from the serving cell, or the SSB index value field (for example: deriveSSB-IndexFromCell) is used to obtain the SSB index value from the serving cell in the NR measurement object information element (for example: MeasObjectNR).
- the SSB index value field for example: deriveSSB-IndexFromCell
- the NR measurement object information element for example: MeasObjectNR.
- At least one of the above fields is used to indicate whether the terminal device determines the synchronized broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell.
- the above field is enabled, it indicates that the terminal device determines the synchronized broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell.
- the boundaries of the time units of the same number of the terminal device candidate cell and the reference cell are aligned, and the terminal device determines the time unit according to the reference cell.
- the terminal device detects/receives the synchronization broadcast block, and determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell according to the detected/received synchronization broadcast block and the corresponding synchronization broadcast block index value, that is, determines the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell.
- the terminal device maintains the downlink timing relationship of the candidate cell, that is, maintains the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell.
- a new domain for obtaining the synchronization broadcast block index value from the serving cell is added in the RRC, or the SSB index value domain (e.g., deriveSSB-IndexFromCell) is used to obtain the SSB index value from the serving cell in the NR measurement object information element (e.g., MeasObjectNR).
- the NR measurement object information element e.g., MeasObjectNR.
- At least one of the above domains is used to indicate whether the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell.
- the above domain is enabled, it indicates that the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell.
- the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell based on the timing relationship of the reference cell, the terminal device detects/receives the synchronization broadcast block, and determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell based on the detected/received synchronization broadcast block and the corresponding synchronization broadcast block index value, that is, determining the boundaries of the time units (e.g., frames, subframes, time slots) of the candidate cell.
- the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell based on the timing relationship of the reference cell.
- the number of time units included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell determined by the terminal device is determined by the value of at least one time unit number field, for example: the number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field, for another example: the number of symbols included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field, for another example: the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is M ⁇ K ⁇ TC or M ⁇ K ⁇ TS , where M is the value of the sampling interval number field, K is the sampling interval number factor, and for the sampling interval number factor K, the value of the sampling interval number factor K can be determined by at least one of the following methods: the value of K is determined by the network device through RRC/MAC CE/DCI signaling configuration, the value of K is a default value, the value
- a new synchronized broadcast block index value field is added to the RRC to obtain the synchronized broadcast block index value from the serving cell, or the SSB index value field is obtained from the serving cell in the NR measurement object information element (for example: MeasObjectNR) (for example: deriveSSB-IndexFromCell), and at least one of the above fields is used to indicate whether the terminal device determines the synchronized broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell.
- the above field is enabled, it indicates that the terminal device determines the synchronized broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell.
- This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by determining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell, so that the terminal device uses as little bit information as possible when acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, thereby reducing the overhead of the terminal device; and/or using limited downlink synchronization information to perform more accurate downlink synchronization of the candidate cell.
- this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
- the terminal device can save, update or clear the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell in a timely manner.
- saving, updating, or clearing downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes at least one of the following:
- the terminal device detects and/or receives the synchronization broadcast block of the candidate cell, and obtains or gets the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the synchronization broadcast block. If the terminal device detects and/or receives a new synchronization broadcast block, it clears the old downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, obtains or gets the latest downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the latest synchronization broadcast block, and the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the latest downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device may also save, update or clear the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
- the network device configures a downlink synchronization information validity timer, which includes a duration for which the downlink synchronization information is valid.
- a downlink synchronization information validity timer which includes a duration for which the downlink synchronization information is valid.
- the terminal device saves the downlink synchronization information of a candidate cell, it restarts the timer corresponding to the candidate cell.
- the terminal device considers the saved downlink synchronization information to be valid. If the timer times out, that is, the time for saving the downlink synchronization information exceeds the duration for which the downlink synchronization information is valid, it indicates that the saved downlink synchronization information is invalid, and the terminal device cannot perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device clears the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, that is, the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell is no longer saved, and the terminal device can no longer perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device when the terminal device receives indication information from the network device or sends indication information to the network device, except for the candidate cell corresponding to the indication information, also called the target cell, the terminal device clears the downlink synchronization information of other candidate cells, that is, the downlink synchronization information of other candidate cells is no longer saved, and the terminal device can no longer perform downlink synchronization on other candidate cells based on the saved downlink synchronization information, wherein the indication information includes at least one of the following: a physical downlink control channel command (e.g., PDCCH order), a cell switching command (e.g., cell switch command), a cell switching confirmation message sent by the terminal device to the target cell, and a confirmation indication of the network device to the cell switching confirmation message sent by the terminal device to the target cell.
- a physical downlink control channel command e.g., PDCCH order
- a cell switching command e.g., cell switch command
- a cell switching confirmation message sent by the terminal device to the target cell
- the terminal device clears the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, that is, the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell is no longer saved, and the terminal device can no longer perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information.
- the preset conditions include at least one of the following: the terminal device completes downlink synchronization of the target cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information, and the terminal device receives a confirmation indication from the network device on the cell switching confirmation message sent to the target cell.
- FIG. 18 is a flow chart of a control method according to a ninth embodiment.
- the control method can be applied to a network device (eg, a base station), and includes the following steps:
- S2 Send the first downlink information so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information.
- the network device sends the first downlink information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
- the method further comprises:
- S1 Send the second downlink information so that the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
- the network device sends the second downlink information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information, and then performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell in combination with the first downlink information.
- the method comprises at least one of the following:
- the first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command
- the downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field;
- the second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and a downlink signal.
- the first downlink information includes PDCCH order and/or cell switching command.
- the downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance-to-reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field.
- the second downlink information includes at least one of MAC CE, DCI and a downlink signal.
- the step of the terminal device acquiring or obtaining downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information includes at least one of the following:
- the terminal device selects or determines a candidate cell according to the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit and/or downlink control information, and acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
- the terminal device determines the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, and obtains or acquires the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions.
- the network device may select or determine a candidate cell based on the measurement results reported by the terminal device, and indicate to the terminal device through MAC CE the candidate cells that require downlink synchronization and acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cells indicated in MAC CE and acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cells.
- the network device may select or determine a candidate cell according to a measurement result reported by the terminal device, where the measurement result is obtained by the terminal device measuring a downlink signal of the candidate cell.
- the network device indicates to the terminal device the candidate cell that needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get downlink synchronization information by adding a candidate cell identifier in the DCI.
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the DCI and obtains or gets the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
- the terminal device acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information corresponding to a candidate cell whose measurement results meet preset conditions.
- the preset conditions include that the offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the measurement result of the source cell, and/or that the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value.
- the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on preset rules and according to the time unit of the reference cell.
- the reference cell includes at least one of the source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of the cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by the network device.
- the preset rule includes at least one of the following:
- the number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field
- the number of symbols contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field
- the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the sampling interval number field and/or the sampling interval number factor.
- the terminal device may acquire or obtain the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the time unit boundary of the reference cell and the timing relationship of the candidate cell, or may determine the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell.
- the terminal device may also save, update or clear the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
- the downlink synchronization information saved by the terminal device is usually time-sensitive. If the terminal device detects or receives a synchronization broadcast block of a candidate cell, the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be saved based on the synchronization broadcast block. If the terminal device detects or receives a new synchronization broadcast block, the old downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be cleared, and the latest downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be saved based on the latest synchronization broadcast block. The terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the latest downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device if the downlink synchronization information saved by the terminal device exceeds the validity duration of the downlink synchronization information, it means that the saved downlink synchronization information is invalid, and the terminal device cannot perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information.
- the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be cleared.
- the terminal device may clear the downlink synchronization information of other candidate cells except the candidate cell corresponding to the indication information.
- the terminal device can clear the downlink synchronization information of the corresponding candidate cell.
- This embodiment uses the above scheme, specifically by sending the first downlink information, so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information, so that the terminal device can determine the candidate cell that needs to obtain or get the downlink synchronization information before receiving the cell switching command, and perform the downlink synchronization operation based on the first downlink information, thereby reducing the waiting time after receiving the cell switching command, thereby reducing Low latency during cell switching.
- FIG 19 is a schematic diagram of the first interaction sequence according to the tenth embodiment. Based on any of the above embodiments, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
- a network device eg, a base station
- a terminal device eg, a mobile phone
- the network device sends the second downlink information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
- the network device sends first downlink information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device when the terminal device receives the indication information from the network device, it selects or determines the candidate cell according to the indication information, and then determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell according to the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell and the timing relationship of the reference cell (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot), that is, determines the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell, wherein the indication information includes at least one of the following: physical downlink control channel command (e.g., PDCCH order), cell switching command (e.g., cell switch command).
- PDCCH order physical downlink control channel command
- cell switching command e.g., cell switch command
- FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of a second interaction sequence according to the tenth embodiment.
- the terminal device when the terminal device receives a cell switching command, it performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell according to the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
- the terminal device reports to the network device the capability value of storing downlink synchronization information of candidate cells, i.e., the maximum number of candidate cells for which the terminal device stores downlink synchronization information of candidate cells, and measures downlink signals of the candidate cells, and then reports the measurement results to the network device.
- the capability value of storing downlink synchronization information of candidate cells i.e., the maximum number of candidate cells for which the terminal device stores downlink synchronization information of candidate cells, and measures downlink signals of the candidate cells, and then reports the measurement results to the network device.
- the network device selects or determines a candidate cell, and indicates to the terminal device through MAC CE the candidate cell that needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the MAC CE and obtains or acquires downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
- the terminal device measures the downlink signal of the candidate cell and reports the measurement result to the network device.
- the network device selects or determines a candidate cell, and indicates to the terminal device the candidate cell that needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or acquire downlink synchronization information by adding a candidate cell identifier in the DCI.
- the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the DCI and acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
- the terminal device acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information corresponding to a candidate cell whose measurement results meet preset conditions.
- the preset conditions include that the offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the measurement result of the source cell, and/or that the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value.
- the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on preset rules and according to the time unit of the reference cell.
- the reference cell includes at least one of the source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of the cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by the network device.
- the terminal device may acquire or obtain the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the time unit boundary of the reference cell and the timing relationship of the candidate cell, or may determine the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell.
- the terminal device may also save, update or clear the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
- the downlink synchronization information saved by the terminal device is usually time-sensitive. If the terminal device detects or receives a synchronization broadcast block of a candidate cell, the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be saved based on the synchronization broadcast block. If the terminal device detects or receives a new synchronization broadcast block, the old downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be cleared, and the latest downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be saved based on the latest synchronization broadcast block. The terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the latest downlink synchronization information.
- the terminal device if the downlink synchronization information saved by the terminal device exceeds the validity duration of the downlink synchronization information, it means that the saved downlink synchronization information is invalid, and the terminal device cannot perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information.
- the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be cleared.
- the terminal device may clear the downlink synchronization information of other candidate cells except the candidate cell corresponding to the indication information.
- the terminal device can clear the downlink synchronization information of the corresponding candidate cell.
- This embodiment uses the above scheme, specifically, by sending the first downlink information and/or the second downlink information to the terminal device through the network device, so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information, and/or, the terminal device obtains or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information, so that the terminal device can determine the candidate cell that needs to obtain or obtain the downlink synchronization information before receiving the cell switching command, and perform the downlink synchronization operation based on the first downlink information, thereby reducing the waiting time after receiving the cell switching command, thereby reducing the delay in the cell switching process.
- FIG 21 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the control device provided in the embodiment of the present application.
- the device can be mounted on or is the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
- the device can be used to perform some or all of the functions in the method embodiment described in the above embodiment.
- the control device 110 includes:
- the control module 111 is configured to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
- the device further comprises:
- the downlink synchronization information is acquired or obtained based on the second downlink information.
- acquiring or obtaining downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information includes at least one of the following:
- the measurement result of the candidate cell is determined according to the downlink signal, and the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset condition is acquired or obtained.
- the device comprises at least one of the following:
- the satisfying of the preset condition includes: an offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the measurement result of the source cell, and/or the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value;
- the acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes: acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to a time unit of a reference cell based on a preset rule.
- the device further comprises at least one of the following:
- the reference cell includes at least one of the following: a source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of a cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by a network device;
- the preset rules include at least one of the following: the number of time slots included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field; the number of symbols included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field; the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the sampling interval number field and/or the sampling interval number factor.
- the device further comprises at least one of the following:
- the first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command
- the downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field;
- the second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and a downlink signal.
- saving, updating, or clearing downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes at least one of the following:
- control device provided in the embodiment of the present application can execute the technical solution shown in the above method embodiment, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
- FIG 22 is a second schematic diagram of the structure of the control device provided in the embodiment of the present application.
- the device can be mounted on or is the network device in the above method embodiment.
- the device can be used to perform some or all of the functions in the method embodiment described in the above embodiment.
- the control device 120 includes:
- the sending module 121 is used to send the first downlink information so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information.
- the device further comprises:
- the second downlink information is sent so that the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
- the device comprises at least one of the following:
- the first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command
- the downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field;
- the second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and a downlink signal.
- the step of the terminal device acquiring or obtaining downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information includes at least one of the following:
- the terminal device selects or determines a candidate cell according to the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit and/or downlink control information, and acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
- the terminal device determines the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, and obtains or acquires the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions.
- control device provided in the embodiment of the present application can execute the technical solution shown in the above method embodiment, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
- the communication device 140 described in this embodiment can be a terminal device (or a component that can be used for a terminal device) or a network device (or a component that can be used for a network device) mentioned in the aforementioned method embodiment.
- the communication device 140 can be used to implement the method corresponding to the terminal device or the network device described in the aforementioned method embodiment, and specifically refer to the description in the aforementioned method embodiment.
- the communication device 140 may include one or more processors 141, which may also be referred to as a processing unit, and may implement certain control or processing functions.
- the processor 141 may be a general-purpose processor or a dedicated processor, etc. For example, it may be a baseband processor or a central processing unit.
- the baseband processor may be used to process the communication protocol and communication data
- the central processing unit may be used to control the communication device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
- the processor 141 may also store instructions 143 or data (eg, intermediate data).
- the instructions 143 may be executed by the processor 141, so that the communication device 140 executes the method corresponding to the terminal device or network device described in the above method embodiment.
- the communication device 140 may include a circuit, which can implement the functions of sending or receiving or communicating in the aforementioned method embodiments.
- the communication device 140 may include one or more memories 142, on which instructions 144 may be stored. The instructions may be executed on the processor 141, so that the communication device 140 executes the method described in the above method embodiment.
- data may also be stored in the memory 142.
- the processor 141 and the memory 142 may be provided separately or integrated together.
- the communication device 140 may further include a transceiver 145 and/or an antenna 146.
- the processor 141 may be referred to as a processing unit, and controls the communication device 140 (terminal device or core network device or wireless access network device).
- the transceiver 145 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and is used to implement the transceiver function of the communication device 140.
- the transceiver 145 can receive the first downlink information and/or the second downlink information; and the processor 141 can perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
- the specific implementation process of the processor 141 and the transceiver 145 can refer to the relevant description of the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
- the transceiver 145 can send the first downlink information and/or the second downlink information so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
- the specific implementation process of the processor 141 and the transceiver 145 can refer to the relevant description of the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
- the processor 141 and the transceiver 145 described in the present application can be implemented in an IC (Integrated Circuit), an analog integrated circuit, an RFIC (Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit), a mixed signal integrated circuit, an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), a PCB (Printed Circuit Board), an electronic device, etc.
- IC Integrated Circuit
- RFIC Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit
- ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
- PCB Print Circuit Board
- the processor 141 and the transceiver 145 can also be manufactured using various integrated circuit process technologies, such as CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor), NMOS (N Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor), PMOS (Positive channel Metal Oxide Semiconductor), BJT (Bipolar Junction Transistor), bipolar CMOS (BiCMOS), silicon germanium (SiGe), gallium arsenide (GaAs), etc.
- CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
- NMOS N Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor
- PMOS Positive channel Metal Oxide Semiconductor
- BJT Bipolar Junction Transistor
- BiCMOS bipolar CMOS
- SiGe silicon germanium
- GaAs gallium arsenide
- the communication device may be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a base station), which needs to be determined according to the context.
- the terminal device may be implemented in various forms.
- the terminal device described in this application may include mobile terminals such as mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, PDAs, portable media players (PMPs), navigation devices, wearable devices, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc., as well as fixed terminal devices such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
- the communication device is described by taking a terminal device or a network device as an example, the scope of the communication device described in the present application is not limited to the above terminal device or network device, and the structure of the communication device may not be limited by Figure 23.
- the communication device may be an independent device or may be part of a larger device.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, including: a terminal device as in any of the above method embodiments; and a network device as in any of the above method embodiments.
- the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, including a memory and a processor, wherein a control program is stored in the memory, and when the control program is executed by the processor, the steps of the control method in any of the above embodiments are implemented.
- the communication device in the present application can be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a base station), and the specific reference needs to be clarified according to the context.
- An embodiment of the present application further provides a storage medium having a control program stored thereon.
- the control program is executed by a processor, the steps of the control method in any of the above embodiments are implemented.
- the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program code.
- a computer program product which includes a computer program code.
- the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the methods in the above various possible implementation modes.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including a memory and a processor, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that a device equipped with the chip executes the methods in various possible implementation modes as described above.
- the units in the device of the embodiment of the present application can be merged, divided and deleted according to actual needs.
- a computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
- the computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
- Computer instructions can be stored in a storage medium or transmitted from one storage medium to another storage medium.
- computer instructions can be transmitted from one website, computer, server or data center to another website, computer, server or data center by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
- the storage medium can be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server or data center that includes one or more available media integrated. Available media can be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disk, storage disk, tape), optical media (e.g., DVD), or semiconductor media (e.g., solid-state storage disk Solid State Disk (SSD)), etc.
Landscapes
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
According to the technical solution of the present application, downlink synchronization is performed on a candidate cell on the basis of first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information, so that a terminal device can acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell before receiving a cell handover command, and then performs a downlink synchronization operation on the basis of the first downlink information, thereby reducing the waiting time after the cell handover command is received, and reducing the delay in the cell handover process.
Description
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种控制方法、通信设备及存储介质。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a control method, communication equipment and storage medium.
现有协议的移动性场景中,终端设备在接收到小区切换命令之后,才进行下行同步操作,该操作包括测量目标小区的同步广播块以获取与目标小区的时间和频率同步,以及检测目标小区的物理层小区ID。由于在接收到小区切换命令之后才进行下行同步操作,需要较长的等待时间,导致执行小区切换的时延较长。In the mobility scenario of the existing protocol, the terminal device performs downlink synchronization operation only after receiving the cell switching command, which includes measuring the synchronization broadcast block of the target cell to obtain time and frequency synchronization with the target cell, and detecting the physical layer cell ID of the target cell. Since the downlink synchronization operation is performed only after receiving the cell switching command, a long waiting time is required, resulting in a long delay in executing the cell switching.
因此,有必要提出一种降低小区切换过程中的时延的解决方案。Therefore, it is necessary to propose a solution to reduce the delay in the cell switching process.
前面的叙述在于提供一般的背景信息,并不一定构成现有技术。The preceding description is intended to provide general background information and does not necessarily constitute prior art.
本申请的主要目的在于提供一种控制方法、通信设备及存储介质,旨在降低小区切换过程中的时延。The main purpose of the present application is to provide a control method, a communication device and a storage medium, aiming to reduce the delay in the cell switching process.
为实现上述目的,本申请提供的一种控制方法,可应用于终端设备(如手机),包括步骤:To achieve the above purpose, the present application provides a control method, which can be applied to a terminal device (such as a mobile phone), comprising the steps of:
S4:基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。S4: Perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
可选地,所述方法还包括:Optionally, the method further comprises:
S3:基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息。S3: Acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
可选地,步骤S3包括以下至少一项:Optionally, step S3 includes at least one of the following:
根据候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元和/或下行控制信息选取或确定候选小区,获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息;Select or determine a candidate cell according to the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit and/or downlink control information, and acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
根据下行信号确定候选小区的测量结果,获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息。The measurement result of the candidate cell is determined according to the downlink signal, and the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset condition is acquired or obtained.
可选地,所述方法包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the method comprises at least one of the following:
所述满足预设条件包括:候选小区的测量结果的偏移值大于或等于源小区的测量结果,和/或,候选小区的测量结果大于或等于预设门限值;The satisfying of the preset condition includes: an offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the measurement result of the source cell, and/or the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value;
所述获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,包括:基于预设规则,根据参考小区的时间单元获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息。The acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes: acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to a time unit of a reference cell based on a preset rule.
可选地,所述方法还包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the method further comprises at least one of the following:
所述参考小区包括以下至少一项:源小区、与候选小区在相同的频率载波上且已被检测出的小区、候选小区对应小区组的特殊小区以及网络设备配置的参考小区;The reference cell includes at least one of the following: a source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of a cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by a network device;
所述预设规则包括以下至少一项:候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时隙数由时隙数域的取值决定;候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定;候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数由采样间隔数域的取值和/或采样间隔数因子决定。The preset rules include at least one of the following: the number of time slots included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field; the number of symbols included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field; the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the sampling interval number field and/or the sampling interval number factor.
可选地,所述方法还包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the method further comprises at least one of the following:
第一下行信息包括物理下行控制信道命令和/或小区切换命令;The first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command;
所述下行同步信息包括候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域、频率内候选小区判定域、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域中的至少一项;The downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field;
保存或更新或清空下行同步信息;Save, update or clear downlink synchronization information;
第二下行信息包括候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元、下行控制信息及下行信号中的至少一项。The second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and a downlink signal.
可选地,保存或更新或清空候选小区的下行同步信息,包括以下至少一项:Optionally, saving, updating, or clearing downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes at least one of the following:
响应于检测到或接收到新的同步广播块,保存或更新候选小区的下行同步信息,和/或,重启候选小区对应的下行同步信息时效性定时器;In response to detecting or receiving a new synchronization broadcast block, saving or updating downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, and/or restarting a downlink synchronization information validity timer corresponding to the candidate cell;
响应于候选小区对应的下行同步信息时效性定时器超时,清空候选小区的下行同步信息;In response to the downlink synchronization information validity timer corresponding to the candidate cell expiring, clearing the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
响应于发送或接收到指示信息,清空所述指示信息对应的候选小区以外的候选小区的下行同步信息;In response to sending or receiving the indication information, clearing downlink synchronization information of candidate cells other than the candidate cell corresponding to the indication information;
响应于完成下行同步和/或收到确认指示,清空对应的候选小区的下行同步信息。In response to completing downlink synchronization and/or receiving a confirmation indication, clearing downlink synchronization information of the corresponding candidate cell.
本申请还提供一种控制方法,可应用于网络设备(如基站),包括步骤:The present application also provides a control method, which can be applied to a network device (such as a base station), comprising the steps of:
S2:发送第一下行信息,以使终端设备基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。S2: Send the first downlink information so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information.
可选地,所述方法还包括:Optionally, the method further comprises:
S1:发送第二下行信息,以使终端设备基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息。S1: Send the second downlink information so that the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
可选地,所述方法包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the method comprises at least one of the following:
所述第一下行信息包括物理下行控制信道命令和/或小区切换命令;The first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command;
所述下行同步信息包括候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域、频率内候选小区判定域、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域中的至少一项;The downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field;
第二下行信息包括候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元、下行控制信息及下行信号中的至少一项。The second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and a downlink signal.
可选地,所述终端设备基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息的步骤包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the step of the terminal device acquiring or obtaining downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information includes at least one of the following:
所述终端设备根据候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元和/或下行控制信息选取或确定候选小区,获
取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息;The terminal device selects or determines a candidate cell according to the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit and/or downlink control information, and obtains Obtain or obtain downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
所述终端设备根据下行信号确定候选小区的测量结果,获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息。The terminal device determines the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, and obtains or acquires the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions.
本申请还提供一种通信设备,包括:存储器、处理器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的控制程序,所述控制程序被所述处理器执行时实现如上任一所述的控制方法的步骤。The present application also provides a communication device, comprising: a memory, a processor, and a control program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, wherein the control program implements the steps of any of the control methods described above when executed by the processor.
本申请还提供一种存储介质,其中,所述存储介质上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如上任一所述的控制方法的步骤。The present application also provides a storage medium, wherein a computer program is stored on the storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of any of the control methods described above are implemented.
本申请技术方案通过基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步,使终端设备在接收到小区切换命令之前即可获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,进而结合第一下行信息进行下行同步操作,减少接收到小区切换命令之后的等待时间,从而降低小区切换过程中的时延。The technical solution of the present application performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information, so that the terminal device can obtain or get the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell before receiving the cell switching command, and then perform downlink synchronization operations in combination with the first downlink information, thereby reducing the waiting time after receiving the cell switching command, thereby reducing the delay in the cell switching process.
此处的附图被并入说明书中并构成本说明书的一部分,示出了符合本申请的实施例,并与说明书一起用于解释本申请的原理。为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,对于本领域普通技术人员而言,在不付出创造性劳动性的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。The drawings herein are incorporated into the specification and constitute a part of the specification, illustrate embodiments consistent with the present application, and are used together with the specification to explain the principles of the present application. In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the drawings required for use in the description of the embodiments are briefly introduced below. Obviously, for ordinary technicians in this field, other drawings can be obtained based on these drawings without creative labor.
图1为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图;FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal for implementing various embodiments of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络系统架构图;FIG2 is a diagram of a communication network system architecture provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请提供的一种控制器140的硬件结构示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a controller 140 provided in the present application;
图4为本申请提供的一种网络节点150的硬件结构示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a network node 150 provided in the present application;
图5为根据第一实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG5 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to the first embodiment;
图6为根据第二实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG6 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a second embodiment;
图7为根据第二实施例示出的控制方法的第一示例示意图;FIG7 is a schematic diagram of a first example of a control method according to the second embodiment;
图8为根据第二实施例示出的控制方法的第二示例示意图;FIG8 is a second exemplary schematic diagram of a control method according to the second embodiment;
图9为根据第二实施例示出的控制方法的第三示例示意图;FIG9 is a schematic diagram of a third example of a control method according to the second embodiment;
图10为根据第二实施例示出的控制方法的第四示例示意图;FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a fourth example of a control method according to the second embodiment;
图11为根据第三实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG11 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a third embodiment;
图12为根据第四实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG12 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a fourth embodiment;
图13为根据第五实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG13 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a fifth embodiment;
图14为根据第七实施例示出的控制方法的第一示例示意图;FIG14 is a schematic diagram of a first example of a control method according to the seventh embodiment;
图15为根据第七实施例示出的控制方法的第二示例示意图;FIG15 is a schematic diagram of a second example of a control method according to the seventh embodiment;
图16为根据第七实施例示出的控制方法的第三示例示意图;FIG16 is a third exemplary schematic diagram of a control method according to the seventh embodiment;
图17为根据第七实施例示出的控制方法的第四示例示意图;FIG17 is a schematic diagram of a fourth example of a control method according to the seventh embodiment;
图18为根据第九实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG18 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a ninth embodiment;
图19为根据第十实施例示出的第一交互时序示意图;FIG19 is a schematic diagram of a first interaction sequence according to the tenth embodiment;
图20为根据第十实施例示出的第二交互时序示意图;FIG20 is a schematic diagram of a second interaction sequence according to the tenth embodiment;
图21为本申请实施例提供的控制装置的结构示意图一;FIG21 is a first structural diagram of a control device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图22为本申请实施例提供的控制装置的结构示意图二;FIG22 is a second structural schematic diagram of a control device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图23为本申请实施例提供的通信设备的结构示意图。FIG23 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
本申请目的的实现、功能特点及优点将结合实施例,参照附图做进一步说明。通过上述附图,已示出本申请明确的实施例,后文中将有更详细的描述。这些附图和文字描述并不是为了通过任何方式限制本申请构思的范围,而是通过参考特定实施例为本领域技术人员说明本申请的概念。The realization of the purpose, functional features and advantages of this application will be further described in conjunction with the embodiments and with reference to the accompanying drawings. The above-mentioned drawings have shown clear embodiments of this application, which will be described in more detail later. These drawings and textual descriptions are not intended to limit the scope of the concept of this application in any way, but to illustrate the concept of this application to those skilled in the art by referring to specific embodiments.
本申请的实施方式Embodiments of the present application
这里将详细地对示例性实施例进行说明,其示例表示在附图中。下面的描述涉及附图时,除非另有表示,不同附图中的相同数字表示相同或相似的要素。以下示例性实施例中所描述的实施方式并不代表与本申请相一致的所有实施方式。相反,它们仅是与如所附权利要求书中所详述的、本申请的一些方面相一致的装置和方法的例子。Exemplary embodiments will be described in detail herein, examples of which are shown in the accompanying drawings. When the following description refers to the drawings, the same numbers in different drawings represent the same or similar elements unless otherwise indicated. The implementations described in the following exemplary embodiments do not represent all implementations consistent with the present application. Instead, they are merely examples of devices and methods consistent with some aspects of the present application as detailed in the appended claims.
需要说明的是,在本文中,术语“包括”、“包含”或者其任何其他变体意在涵盖非排他性的包含,从而使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置不仅包括那些要素,而且还包括没有明确列出的其他要素,或者是还包括为这种过程、方法、物品或者装置所固有的要素。在没有更多限制的情况下,由语句“包括一个……”限定的要素,并不排除在包括该要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置中还存在另外的相同要素,此外,本申请不同实施例中具有同样命名的部件、特征、要素可能具有相同含义,也可能具有不同含义,其具体含义需以其在该具体实施例中的解释或者进一步结合该具体实施例中上下文进行确定。It should be noted that, in this article, the terms "include", "comprises" or any other variants thereof are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion, so that a process, method, article or device including a series of elements includes not only those elements, but also includes other elements not explicitly listed, or also includes elements inherent to such process, method, article or device. In the absence of further restrictions, an element defined by the sentence "includes a ..." does not exclude the existence of other identical elements in the process, method, article or device including the element. In addition, components, features, and elements with the same name in different embodiments of the present application may have the same meaning or different meanings, and their specific meanings need to be determined by their explanation in the specific embodiment or further combined with the context of the specific embodiment.
应当理解,尽管在本文可能采用术语第一、第二、第三等来描述各种信息,但这些信息不应限于这些术语。这些术语仅用来将同一类型的信息彼此区分开。例如,在不脱离本文范围的情况下,第一信息也可以被称为第二信息,类似地,第二信息也可以被称为第一信息。取决于语境,如在此所使用的词语"如果"可以被解释成为"在……时"或"当……时"或"响应于确定"。再者,如同在本文中所使用的,单数形式“一”、“一个”
和“该”旨在也包括复数形式,除非上下文中有相反的指示。应当进一步理解,术语“包含”、“包括”表明存在所述的特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组,但不排除一个或多个其他特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组的存在、出现或添加。本申请使用的术语“或”、“和/或”、“包括以下至少一个”等可被解释为包括性的,或意味着任一个或任何组合。例如,“包括以下至少一个:A、B、C”意味着“以下任一个:A;B;C;A和B;A和C;B和C;A和B和C”,再如,“A、B或C”或者“A、B和/或C”意味着“以下任一个:A;B;C;A和B;A和C;B和C;A和B和C”。仅当元件、功能、步骤或操作的组合在某些方式下内在地互相排斥时,才会出现该定义的例外。It should be understood that although the terms first, second, third, etc. may be used herein to describe various information, such information should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish the same type of information from each other. For example, without departing from the scope of this document, the first information may also be referred to as the second information, and similarly, the second information may also be referred to as the first information. Depending on the context, the word "if" as used herein may be interpreted as "at the time of" or "when" or "in response to determining". Furthermore, as used herein, the singular forms "a", "an" and "an" are used interchangeably. "and" are intended to include plural forms as well, unless there is an indication to the contrary in the context. It should be further understood that the terms "comprise", "include" indicate the presence of the described features, steps, operations, elements, components, items, kinds, and/or groups, but do not exclude the presence, occurrence or addition of one or more other features, steps, operations, elements, components, items, kinds, and/or groups. The terms "or", "and/or", "including at least one of the following", etc. used in this application may be interpreted as inclusive, or mean any one or any combination. For example, "including at least one of the following: A, B, C" means "any one of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C", and for example, "A, B or C" or "A, B and/or C" means "any one of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C". Only when the combination of elements, functions, steps or operations is inherently mutually exclusive in some way, will there be an exception to this definition.
应该理解的是,虽然本申请实施例中的流程图中的各个步骤按照箭头的指示依次显示,但是这些步骤并不是必然按照箭头指示的顺序依次执行。除非本文中有明确的说明,这些步骤的执行并没有严格的顺序限制,其可以以其他的顺序执行。而且,图中的至少一部分步骤可以包括多个子步骤或者多个阶段,这些子步骤或者阶段并不必然是在同一时刻执行完成,而是可以在不同的时刻执行,其执行顺序也不必然是依次进行,而是可以与其他步骤或者其他步骤的子步骤或者阶段的至少一部分轮流或者交替地执行。It should be understood that, although the various steps in the flowchart in the embodiment of the present application are displayed in sequence according to the indication of the arrows, these steps are not necessarily performed in sequence according to the order indicated by the arrows. Unless there is a clear explanation in this article, the execution of these steps does not have a strict order restriction, and it can be performed in other orders. Moreover, at least a portion of the steps in the figure may include a plurality of sub-steps or a plurality of stages, and these sub-steps or stages are not necessarily performed at the same time, but can be performed at different times, and their execution order is not necessarily performed in sequence, but can be performed in turn or alternately with other steps or at least a portion of the sub-steps or stages of other steps.
取决于语境,如在此所使用的词语“如果”、“若”可以被解释成为“在……时”或“当……时”或“响应于确定”或“响应于检测”。类似地,取决于语境,短语“如果确定”或“如果检测(陈述的条件或事件)”可以被解释成为“当确定时”或“响应于确定”或“当检测(陈述的条件或事件)时”或“响应于检测(陈述的条件或事件)”。As used herein, the words "if" and "if" may be interpreted as "at the time of" or "when" or "in response to determining" or "in response to detecting", depending on the context. Similarly, the phrases "if it is determined" or "if (stated condition or event) is detected" may be interpreted as "when it is determined" or "in response to determining" or "when detecting (stated condition or event)" or "in response to detecting (stated condition or event)", depending on the context.
需要说明的是,在本文中,采用了诸如S1、S2等步骤代号,其目的是为了更清楚简要地表述相应内容,不构成顺序上的实质性限制,本领域技术人员在具体实施时,可能会先执行S2后执行S1等,但这些均应在本申请的保护范围之内。It should be noted that in this article, step codes such as S1 and S2 are used for the purpose of expressing the corresponding content more clearly and concisely, and do not constitute a substantial limitation on the order. When implementing the step, those skilled in the art may execute S2 first and then S1, etc., but these should all be within the scope of protection of this application.
应当理解,此处所描述的具体实施例仅仅用以解释本申请,并不用于限定本申请。It should be understood that the specific embodiments described herein are only used to explain the present application and are not used to limit the present application.
在后续的描述中,使用用于表示元件的诸如“模块”、“部件”或者“单元”的后缀仅为了有利于本申请的说明,其本身没有特定的意义。因此,“模块”、“部件”或者“单元”可以混合地使用。In the subsequent description, the suffixes such as "module", "component" or "unit" used to represent elements are only used to facilitate the description of the present application, and have no specific meanings. Therefore, "module", "component" or "unit" can be used in a mixed manner.
本申请中的通信设备,可以是终端设备(如手机),也可以是网络设备(如基站),具体所指,需要根据上下文加以明确。The communication device in this application can be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a base station). The specific reference needs to be clarified based on the context.
终端设备可以以各种形式来实施。例如,本申请中描述的终端设备可以包括诸如手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、便捷式媒体播放器(Portable Media Player,PMP)、导航装置、可穿戴设备、智能手环、计步器等智能终端设备,以及诸如数字TV、台式计算机等固定终端设备。The terminal device may be implemented in various forms. For example, the terminal device described in this application may include intelligent terminal devices such as mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, PDAs, portable media players (PMPs), navigation devices, wearable devices, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc., as well as fixed terminal devices such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
后续描述中将以移动终端为例进行说明,本领域技术人员将理解的是,除了特别用于移动目的的元件之外,根据本申请的实施方式的构造也能够应用于固定类型的终端设备。The subsequent description will be made by taking a mobile terminal as an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that, in addition to components specifically used for mobile purposes, the construction according to the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to fixed-type terminal devices.
请参阅图1,其为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图,该移动终端100可以包括:RF(Radio Frequency,射频)单元101、WiFi模块102、音频输出单元103、A/V(音频/视频)输入单元104、传感器105、显示单元106、用户输入单元107、接口单元108、存储器109、处理器110、以及电源111等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解,图1中示出的移动终端结构并不构成对移动终端的限定,移动终端可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。Please refer to FIG. 1, which is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal for implementing various embodiments of the present application. The mobile terminal 100 may include: an RF (Radio Frequency) unit 101, a WiFi module 102, an audio output unit 103, an A/V (audio/video) input unit 104, a sensor 105, a display unit 106, a user input unit 107, an interface unit 108, a memory 109, a processor 110, and a power supply 111. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the mobile terminal structure shown in FIG. 1 does not constitute a limitation on the mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or arrange the components differently.
下面结合图1对移动终端的各个部件进行具体的介绍:The following is a detailed introduction to the various components of the mobile terminal in conjunction with Figure 1:
射频单元101可用于收发信息或通话过程中,信号的接收和发送,具体的,将基站的下行信息接收后,给处理器110处理;另外,将上行的数据发送给基站。通常,射频单元101包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器、双工器等。此外,射频单元101还可以通过无线通信与网络和其他设备通信。上述无线通信可以使用任一通信标准或协议,包括但不限于GSM(Global System of Mobile communication,全球移动通讯系统)、GPRS(General Packet Radio Service,通用分组无线服务)、CDMA2000(Code Division Multiple Access 2000,码分多址2000)、WCDMA(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,宽带码分多址)、TD-SCDMA(Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access,时分同步码分多址)、FDD-LTE(Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution,频分双工长期演进)、TDD-LTE(Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution,分时双工长期演进)、5G和6G等。The radio frequency unit 101 can be used for receiving and sending signals during information transmission or communication. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, it is sent to the processor 110 for processing; in addition, the uplink data is sent to the base station. Generally, the radio frequency unit 101 includes but is not limited to an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, etc. In addition, the radio frequency unit 101 can also communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication. The above-mentioned wireless communications may use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access 2000), WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), FDD-LTE (Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution), TDD-LTE (Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution), 5G and 6G, etc.
WiFi属于短距离无线传输技术,移动终端通过WiFi模块102可以帮助用户收发电子邮件、浏览网页和访问流式媒体等,它为用户提供了无线的宽带互联网访问。虽然图1示出了WiFi模块102,但是可以理解的是,其并不属于移动终端的必须构成,完全可以根据需要在不改变发明的本质的范围内而省略。WiFi is a short-range wireless transmission technology. The mobile terminal can help users send and receive emails, browse web pages, and access streaming media through the WiFi module 102, which provides users with wireless broadband Internet access. Although FIG1 shows the WiFi module 102, it is understandable that it is not a necessary component of the mobile terminal and can be omitted as needed without changing the essence of the invention.
音频输出单元103可以在移动终端100处于呼叫信号接收模式、通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式、广播接收模式等等模式下时,将射频单元101或WiFi模块102接收的或者在存储器109中存储的音频数据转换成音频信号并且输出为声音。而且,音频输出单元103还可以提供与移动终端100执行的特定功能相关的音频输出(例如,呼叫信号接收声音、消息接收声音等等)。音频输出单元103可以包括扬声器、蜂鸣器等等。The audio output unit 103 can convert the audio data received by the RF unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 or stored in the memory 109 into an audio signal and output it as sound when the mobile terminal 100 is in a call signal reception mode, a talk mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, a broadcast reception mode, etc. Moreover, the audio output unit 103 can also provide audio output related to a specific function performed by the mobile terminal 100 (for example, a call signal reception sound, a message reception sound, etc.). The audio output unit 103 may include a speaker, a buzzer, etc.
A/V输入单元104用于接收音频或视频信号。A/V输入单元104可以包括图形处理器(Graphics Processing Unit,GPU)1041和麦克风1042,图形处理器1041对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。处理后的图像帧可以显示在显示单元106上。经图形处理器1041处理后的图像帧可以存储在存储器109(或其它存储介质)中或者经由射频单元101或WiFi模块102进行发送。麦克风1042可以在电话通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式等等运行模式中经由麦克风1042接收声音(音频数据),并且能够将这样的声音处理为音频数据。处理后的音频(语音)数据可以在电话通话模式的情况下转换为可经由射频单元101发送到移动通信基站的格式输出。麦克风1042可以实施各种类型的噪声消除(或抑制)算法以消除(或抑制)在接收和发送音频信号的过程中产生的噪声或者干扰。The A/V input unit 104 is used to receive audio or video signals. The A/V input unit 104 may include a graphics processor (GPU) 1041 and a microphone 1042, and the graphics processor 1041 processes the image data of a static picture or video obtained by an image capture device (such as a camera) in a video capture mode or an image capture mode. The processed image frame can be displayed on the display unit 106. The image frame processed by the graphics processor 1041 can be stored in the memory 109 (or other storage medium) or sent via the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102. The microphone 1042 can receive sound (audio data) via the microphone 1042 in a telephone call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, and other operating modes, and can process such sound into audio data. The processed audio (voice) data can be converted into a format output that can be sent to a mobile communication base station via the radio frequency unit 101 in the case of a telephone call mode. The microphone 1042 can implement various types of noise elimination (or suppression) algorithms to eliminate (or suppress) noise or interference generated in the process of receiving and sending audio signals.
移动终端100还包括至少一种传感器105,比如光传感器、运动传感器以及其他传感器。可选地,光传感器包括环境光传感器及接近传感器,可选地,环境光传感器可根据环境光线的明暗来调节显示面板1061的亮度,接近传感器可在移动终端100移动到耳边时,关闭显示面板1061和/或背光。作为运动传感器的一种,加速计传感器可检测各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小,静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向,可用于识别手机姿态的应用(比如横竖屏切换、相关游戏、磁力计姿态校准)、振动识别相关功能(比如计步器、敲击)等;至于手机还可配置的指纹传感器、压力传感器、虹膜传感器、分子传感器、陀螺仪、气压计、湿度计、温度计、红外线传感器等其他传感器,在此不再赘述。The mobile terminal 100 also includes at least one sensor 105, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors. Optionally, the light sensor includes an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor. Optionally, the ambient light sensor can adjust the brightness of the display panel 1061 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity sensor can turn off the display panel 1061 and/or the backlight when the mobile terminal 100 is moved to the ear. As a type of motion sensor, the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in all directions (generally three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when stationary. It can be used for applications that identify the posture of the mobile phone (such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, related games, magnetometer posture calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tapping), etc.; as for other sensors that can be configured on the mobile phone, such as fingerprint sensors, pressure sensors, iris sensors, molecular sensors, gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, thermometers, infrared sensors, etc., they will not be repeated here.
显示单元106用于显示由用户输入的信息或提供给用户的信息。显示单元106可包括显示面板1061,可以采用液晶显示器(Liquid Crystal Display,LCD)、有机发光二极管(Organic Light-Emitting Diode,OLED)等形式来配置显示面板1061。The display unit 106 is used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user. The display unit 106 may include a display panel 1061, which may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), or the like.
用户输入单元107可用于接收输入的数字或字符信息,以及产生与移动终端的用户设置以及功能控制有
关的键信号输入。可选地,用户输入单元107可包括触控面板1071以及其他输入设备1072。触控面板1071,也称为触摸屏,可收集用户在其上或附近的触摸操作(比如用户使用手指、触笔等任何适合的物体或附件在触控面板1071上或在触控面板1071附近的操作),并根据预先设定的程式驱动相应的连接装置。触控面板1071可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。可选地,触摸检测装置检测用户的触摸方位,并检测触摸操作带来的信号,将信号传送给触摸控制器;触摸控制器从触摸检测装置上接收触摸信息,并将它转换成触点坐标,再送给处理器110,并能接收处理器110发来的命令并加以执行。此外,可以采用电阻式、电容式、红外线以及表面声波等多种类型实现触控面板1071。除了触控面板1071,用户输入单元107还可以包括其他输入设备1072。可选地,其他输入设备1072可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆等中的一种或多种,具体此处不做限定。The user input unit 107 can be used to receive input digital or character information and generate information related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal. The key signal input of the key. Optionally, the user input unit 107 may include a touch panel 1071 and other input devices 1072. The touch panel 1071, also known as a touch screen, can collect the user's touch operation on or near it (such as the user's operation on the touch panel 1071 or near the touch panel 1071 using any suitable object or accessory such as a finger, stylus, etc.), and drive the corresponding connection device according to a pre-set program. The touch panel 1071 may include two parts: a touch detection device and a touch controller. Optionally, the touch detection device detects the user's touch orientation, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device, converts it into the contact point coordinates, and then sends it to the processor 110, and can receive and execute the command sent by the processor 110. In addition, the touch panel 1071 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared and surface acoustic waves. In addition to the touch panel 1071, the user input unit 107 may also include other input devices 1072. Optionally, other input devices 1072 may include, but are not limited to, one or more of a physical keyboard, function keys (such as volume control keys, switch keys, etc.), a trackball, a mouse, a joystick, etc., which are not specifically limited here.
可选地,触控面板1071可覆盖显示面板1061,当触控面板1071检测到在其上或附近的触摸操作后,传送给处理器110以确定触摸事件的类型,随后处理器110根据触摸事件的类型在显示面板1061上提供相应的视觉输出。虽然在图1中,触控面板1071与显示面板1061是作为两个独立的部件来实现移动终端的输入和输出功能,但是在某些实施例中,可以将触控面板1071与显示面板1061集成而实现移动终端的输入和输出功能,具体此处不做限定。Optionally, the touch panel 1071 may cover the display panel 1061. When the touch panel 1071 detects a touch operation on or near it, it is transmitted to the processor 110 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 110 provides a corresponding visual output on the display panel 1061 according to the type of the touch event. Although in FIG. 1 , the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 are used as two independent components to implement the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, in some embodiments, the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 can be integrated to implement the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, which is not limited to the specifics herein.
接口单元108用作至少一个外部装置与移动终端100连接可以通过的接口。例如,外部装置可以包括有线或无线头戴式耳机端口、外部电源(或电池充电器)端口、有线或无线数据端口、存储卡端口、用于连接具有识别模块的装置的端口、音频输入/输出(I/O)端口、视频I/O端口、耳机端口等等。接口单元108可以用于接收来自外部装置的输入(例如,数据信息、电力等等)并且将接收到的输入传输到移动终端100内的一个或多个元件或者可以用于在移动终端100和外部装置之间传输数据。The interface unit 108 serves as an interface through which at least one external device can be connected to the mobile terminal 100. For example, the external device may include a wired or wireless headset port, an external power supply (or battery charger) port, a wired or wireless data port, a memory card port, a port for connecting a device with an identification module, an audio input/output (I/O) port, a video I/O port, a headphone port, etc. The interface unit 108 may be used to receive input (e.g., data information, power, etc.) from an external device and transmit the received input to one or more elements within the mobile terminal 100 or may be used to transmit data between the mobile terminal 100 and an external device.
存储器109可用于存储软件程序以及各种数据。存储器109可主要包括存储程序区和存储数据区,可选地,存储程序区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等;存储数据区可存储根据手机的使用所创建的数据(比如音频数据、电话本等)等。此外,存储器109可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。The memory 109 can be used to store software programs and various data. The memory 109 can mainly include a program storage area and a data storage area. Optionally, the program storage area can store an operating system, an application required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), etc.; the data storage area can store data created according to the use of the mobile phone (such as audio data, a phone book, etc.), etc. In addition, the memory 109 can include a high-speed random access memory, and can also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, a flash memory device, or other volatile solid-state storage devices.
处理器110是移动终端的控制中心,利用各种接口和线路连接整个移动终端的各个部分,通过运行或执行存储在存储器109内的软件程序和/或模块,以及调用存储在存储器109内的数据,执行移动终端的各种功能和处理数据,从而对移动终端进行整体监控。处理器110可包括一个或多个处理单元;优选的,处理器110可集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器,可选地,应用处理器主要处理操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等,调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信。可以理解的是,上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器110中。The processor 110 is the control center of the mobile terminal. It uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile terminal. It executes various functions of the mobile terminal and processes data by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 109, and calling data stored in the memory 109, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole. The processor 110 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 110 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor. Optionally, the application processor mainly processes the operating system, user interface, and application programs, and the modem processor mainly processes wireless communications. It is understandable that the above-mentioned modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 110.
移动终端100还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源111(比如电池),优选的,电源111可以通过电源管理系统与处理器110逻辑相连,从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。The mobile terminal 100 may also include a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components. Preferably, the power supply 111 may be logically connected to the processor 110 via a power management system, thereby implementing functions such as charging, discharging, and power consumption management through the power management system.
尽管图1未示出,移动终端100还可以包括蓝牙模块等,在此不再赘述。Although not shown in FIG. 1 , the mobile terminal 100 may further include a Bluetooth module, etc., which will not be described in detail herein.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,下面对本申请的移动终端所基于的通信网络系统进行描述。In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the communication network system on which the mobile terminal of the present application is based is described below.
请参阅图2,图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络系统架构图,该通信网络系统为通用移动通信技术的NR(New Radio,新空口)系统,该NR系统包括依次通讯连接的UE(User Equipment,用户设备)201,E-UTRAN(Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network,演进式UMTS陆地无线接入网)202,EPC(Evolved Packet Core,演进式分组核心网)203和运营商的IP业务204。Please refer to Figure 2, which is a communication network system architecture diagram provided in an embodiment of the present application. The communication network system is a NR (New Radio) system of universal mobile communication technology. The NR system includes UE (User Equipment) 201, E-UTRAN (Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network) 202, EPC (Evolved Packet Core) 203 and the operator's IP service 204, which are connected in sequence.
可选地,UE201可以是上述终端设备100,此处不再赘述。Optionally, UE201 may be the above-mentioned terminal device 100, which will not be described in detail here.
E-UTRAN202包括eNodeB2021和其它eNodeB2022等。可选地,eNodeB2021可以通过回程(backhaul)(例如X2接口)与其它eNodeB2022连接,eNodeB2021连接到EPC203,eNodeB2021可以提供UE201到EPC203的接入。E-UTRAN 202 includes eNodeB 2021 and other eNodeBs 2022 , etc. Optionally, eNodeB 2021 may be connected to other eNodeBs 2022 via a backhaul (eg, an X2 interface), and eNodeB 2021 is connected to EPC 203 , and eNodeB 2021 may provide UE 201 with access to EPC 203 .
EPC203可以包括MME(Mobility Management Entity,移动性管理实体)2031,HSS(Home Subscriber Server,归属用户服务器)2032,其它MME2033,SGW(Serving Gate Way,服务网关)2034,PGW(PDN Gate Way,分组数据网络网关)2035和PCRF(Policy and Charging Rules Function,政策和资费功能实体)2036等。可选地,MME2031是处理UE201和EPC203之间信令的控制节点,提供承载和连接管理。HSS2032用于提供一些寄存器来管理诸如归属位置寄存器(图中未示)之类的功能,并且保存有一些有关服务特征、数据速率等用户专用的信息。所有用户数据都可以通过SGW2034进行发送,PGW2035可以提供UE 201的IP地址分配以及其它功能,PCRF2036是业务数据流和IP承载资源的策略与计费控制策略决策点,它为策略与计费执行功能单元(图中未示)选择及提供可用的策略和计费控制决策。EPC203 may include MME (Mobility Management Entity) 2031, HSS (Home Subscriber Server) 2032, other MMEs 2033, SGW (Serving Gate Way) 2034, PGW (PDN Gate Way) 2035 and PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function) 2036. Optionally, MME 2031 is a control node that processes signaling between UE 201 and EPC 203, providing bearer and connection management. HSS 2032 is used to provide some registers to manage functions such as home location register (not shown in the figure), and save some user-specific information such as service features and data rates. All user data can be sent through SGW2034. PGW2035 can provide IP address allocation and other functions for UE 201. PCRF2036 is the policy and charging control policy decision point for service data flow and IP bearer resources. It selects and provides available policy and charging control decisions for the policy and charging execution functional unit (not shown in the figure).
IP业务204可以包括因特网、内联网、IMS(IP Multimedia Subsystem,IP多媒体子系统)或其它IP业务等。IP service 204 may include the Internet, intranet, IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) or other IP services.
虽然上述以LTE系统为例进行了介绍,但本领域技术人员应当知晓,本申请不仅仅适用于LTE系统,也可以适用于其他无线通信系统,例如GSM、CDMA2000、WCDMA、TD-SCDMA、5G以及未来新的网络系统(如6G)等,此处不做限定。Although the above introduction takes the LTE system as an example, those skilled in the art should know that the present application is not only applicable to the LTE system, but also to other wireless communication systems, such as GSM, CDMA2000, WCDMA, TD-SCDMA, 5G and future new network systems (such as 6G), etc., without limitation here.
图3为本申请提供的一种控制器140的硬件结构示意图。该控制器140包括:存储器1401和处理器1402,存储器1401用于存储程序指令,处理器1402用于调用存储器1401中的程序指令执行上述方法实施例一中控制器所执行的步骤,其实现原理以及有益效果类似,此处不再进行赘述。Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a controller 140 provided in the present application. The controller 140 includes: a memory 1401 and a processor 1402, the memory 1401 is used to store program instructions, and the processor 1402 is used to call the program instructions in the memory 1401 to execute the steps performed by the controller in the first embodiment of the above method, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,上述控制器还包括通信接口1403,该通信接口1403可以通过总线1404与处理器1402连接。处理器1402可以控制通信接口1403来实现控制器140的接收和发送的功能。Optionally, the controller further includes a communication interface 1403, which can be connected to the processor 1402 via a bus 1404. The processor 1402 can control the communication interface 1403 to implement the receiving and sending functions of the controller 140.
图4为本申请提供的一种网络节点150的硬件结构示意图。该网络节点150包括:存储器1501和处理器1502,存储器1501用于存储程序指令,处理器1502用于调用存储器1501中的程序指令执行上述方法实施例一中首节点所执行的步骤,其实现原理以及有益效果类似,此处不再进行赘述。Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a network node 150 provided by the present application. The network node 150 includes: a memory 1501 and a processor 1502, the memory 1501 is used to store program instructions, and the processor 1502 is used to call the program instructions in the memory 1501 to execute the steps performed by the first node in the first embodiment of the above method, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,上述控制器还包括通信接口1503,该通信接口1503可以通过总线1504与处理器1502连接。处理器1502可以控制通信接口1503来实现网络节点150的接收和发送的功能。Optionally, the controller further includes a communication interface 1503, which can be connected to the processor 1502 via a bus 1504. The processor 1502 can control the communication interface 1503 to implement the receiving and sending functions of the network node 150.
上述以软件功能模块的形式实现的集成的模块,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。上述软件功能模块存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器(英文:processor)执行本申请各个实施例方法的部分步骤。The above-mentioned integrated module implemented in the form of a software function module can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. The above-mentioned software function module is stored in a storage medium, including a number of instructions for enabling a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (English: processor) to perform some steps of the methods of various embodiments of the present application.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算
机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。计算机指令可以存储在存储介质中,或者从一个存储介质向另一个存储介质传输,例如,计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘solid state disk,SSD)等。In the above embodiments, all or part of the embodiments may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, all or part of the embodiments may be implemented in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the process or function according to the embodiments of the present application is generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer. A computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. Computer instructions can be stored in a storage medium or transmitted from one storage medium to another storage medium. For example, computer instructions can be transmitted from one website, computer, server, or data center to another website, computer, server, or data center by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that includes one or more available media integrated. The available medium can be a magnetic medium (e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (e.g., a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., a solid state disk, SSD), etc.
基于上述移动终端硬件结构以及通信网络系统,提出本申请各个实施例。Based on the above-mentioned mobile terminal hardware structure and communication network system, various embodiments of the present application are proposed.
第一实施例First embodiment
参照图5,图5为根据第一实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图,控制方法可应用于终端设备(如手机),包括步骤:5 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a first embodiment. The control method can be applied to a terminal device (such as a mobile phone), and includes the following steps:
S4:基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。S4: Perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
本申请实施例中,终端设备可以根据第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步,可选地,第一下行信息由网络设备发送至终端设备,下行同步信息可以由终端设备基于网络设备发送的第二下行信息获取或得到。In an embodiment of the present application, the terminal device can perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information. Optionally, the first downlink information is sent by the network device to the terminal device, and the downlink synchronization information can be acquired or obtained by the terminal device based on the second downlink information sent by the network device.
可选地,第一下行信息包括物理下行控制信道命令(PDCCH order,Physical Downlink Control Channel order)和/或小区切换命令。Optionally, the first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel order (PDCCH order, Physical Downlink Control Channel order) and/or a cell switching command.
可选地,终端设备接收到第一下行信息之后,第一下行信息指示的候选小区可以称为目标小区。Optionally, after the terminal device receives the first downlink information, the candidate cell indicated by the first downlink information can be called a target cell.
可选地,下行同步信息包括候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域、频率内候选小区判定域、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域中的至少一项。Optionally, the downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance-to-reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field.
可选地,第二下行信息包括候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元(MAC CE,Media Access Control Control Element)、下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI,)及下行信号中的至少一项。Optionally, the second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control element (MAC CE, Media Access Control Control Element), downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI,) and a downlink signal.
可选地,终端设备向网络设备上报终端设备保存候选小区下行同步信息的能力值,即终端设备保存候选小区下行同步信息的最大候选小区个数,并测量候选小区的下行信号,进而向网络设备上报测量结果。Optionally, the terminal device reports to the network device the capability value of storing downlink synchronization information of candidate cells, i.e., the maximum number of candidate cells for which the terminal device stores downlink synchronization information of candidate cells, and measures downlink signals of the candidate cells, and then reports the measurement results to the network device.
可选地,网络设备选取或确定候选小区,并通过MAC CE向终端设备指示需要进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区。Optionally, the network device selects or determines a candidate cell, and indicates to the terminal device through MAC CE the candidate cell that needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get downlink synchronization information.
可选地,终端设备对MAC CE中指示的候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the MAC CE and obtains or acquires downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备测量候选小区的下行信号并将测量结果上报至网络设备。Optionally, the terminal device measures the downlink signal of the candidate cell and reports the measurement result to the network device.
可选地,网络设备选取或确定候选小区,并通过在DCI中增加候选小区标识向终端设备指示需要进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区。Optionally, the network device selects or determines a candidate cell, and indicates to the terminal device the candidate cell that needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or acquire downlink synchronization information by adding a candidate cell identifier in the DCI.
可选地,终端设备对DCI中指示的候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the DCI and acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息,可选地,满足预设条件包括候选小区的测量结果的偏移值大于或等于源小区的测量结果,和/或,候选小区的测量结果大于或等于预设门限值。Optionally, the terminal device acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information corresponding to a candidate cell whose measurement results meet preset conditions. Optionally, meeting the preset conditions includes that the offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the measurement result of the source cell, and/or the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value.
可选地,终端设备基于预设规则,根据参考小区的时间单元获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,可选地,参考小区包括源小区、与候选小区在相同的频率载波上且已被检测出的小区、候选小区对应小区组的特殊小区以及网络设备配置的参考小区中的至少一项。Optionally, the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on preset rules and according to the time unit of the reference cell. Optionally, the reference cell includes at least one of the source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of the cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by the network device.
可选地,预设规则包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the preset rule includes at least one of the following:
候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时隙数由时隙数域的取值决定;The number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field;
候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定;The number of symbols contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field;
候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数由采样间隔数域的取值和/或采样间隔数因子决定。The number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the sampling interval number field and/or the sampling interval number factor.
可选地,终端设备可以根据参考小区的时间单元边界以及候选小区的定时关系获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,也可以根据候选小区的同步广播块索引值确定候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device may acquire or obtain the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the time unit boundary of the reference cell and the timing relationship of the candidate cell, or may determine the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备还可以保存或更新或清空候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device may also save, update or clear the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备保存的下行同步信息通常具有时效性,如果终端设备检测到或接收到候选小区的同步广播块,可以根据同步广播块保存候选小区的下行同步信息;如果终端设备检测到或接收到新的同步广播块,可以清空该候选小区的旧的下行同步信息,根据最新的同步广播块保存该候选小区的最新的下行同步信息,终端设备根据最新的下行同步信息对该候选小区进行下行同步。Optionally, the downlink synchronization information saved by the terminal device is usually time-sensitive. If the terminal device detects or receives a synchronization broadcast block of a candidate cell, the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be saved based on the synchronization broadcast block. If the terminal device detects or receives a new synchronization broadcast block, the old downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be cleared, and the latest downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be saved based on the latest synchronization broadcast block. The terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the latest downlink synchronization information.
可选地,如果终端设备保存的下行同步信息时间超过下行同步信息有效的持续时间,则表示保存的下行同步信息是无效的,终端设备不能根据保存的下行同步信息对该候选小区进行下行同步,则可以清空该候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, if the downlink synchronization information saved by the terminal device exceeds the validity duration of the downlink synchronization information, it means that the saved downlink synchronization information is invalid, and the terminal device cannot perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information. The downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be cleared.
可选地,如果终端设备从网络设备接收到指示信息或向网络设备发送指示信息时,除了指示信息对应的候选小区,终端设备则可以清空其他候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, if the terminal device receives indication information from the network device or sends indication information to the network device, the terminal device may clear the downlink synchronization information of other candidate cells except the candidate cell corresponding to the indication information.
可选地,如果终端设备根据下行同步信息对目标小区完成下行同步,和/或,终端设备收到网络设备对其向目标小区发送的小区切换确认消息的确认指示,终端设备则可以清空对应的候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, if the terminal device completes downlink synchronization of the target cell according to the downlink synchronization information, and/or the terminal device receives a confirmation indication from the network device regarding the cell switching confirmation message sent to the target cell, the terminal device can clear the downlink synchronization information of the corresponding candidate cell.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步,使终端设备在接收到小区切换命令之前即可获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,并结合第一下行信息进行下行同步操作,减少接收到小区切换命令之后的等待时间,从而降低小区切换过程中的时延。
This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by performing downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information, so that the terminal device can obtain or get the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell before receiving the cell switching command, and perform downlink synchronization operations in combination with the first downlink information, thereby reducing the waiting time after receiving the cell switching command, thereby reducing the delay in the cell switching process.
第二实施例Second embodiment
参照图6,图6为根据第二实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图,在本申请第一实施例的基础上,所述控制方法还包括以下步骤:6 is a flow chart of a control method according to a second embodiment. Based on the first embodiment of the present application, the control method further includes the following steps:
S3:基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息。S3: Acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
可选地,第二下行信息包括MAC CE、DCI以及下行信号中的至少一项。Optionally, the second downlink information includes at least one of MAC CE, DCI and a downlink signal.
可选地,终端设备向网络设备上报终端设备保存候选小区下行同步信息的能力值,即终端设备保存候选小区下行同步信息的最大候选小区个数,和/或终端设备测量候选小区的下行信号,例如:同步广播块(Synchronization Signal and PBCH block,SS/PBCH block)或信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal,CSI-RS),并将测量结果(例如SSBRI/CRI和/或L1-RSRP)上报至网络设备,网络设备选择候选小区,并通过MAC CE向终端设备指示需要进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区。Optionally, the terminal device reports to the network device the capability value of the terminal device to save the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cells, that is, the maximum number of candidate cells for which the terminal device can save the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cells, and/or the terminal device measures the downlink signals of the candidate cells, such as: synchronization broadcast block (Synchronization Signal and PBCH block, SS/PBCH block) or channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI-RS), and reports the measurement results (such as SSBRI/CRI and/or L1-RSRP) to the network device. The network device selects the candidate cells and indicates to the terminal device through MAC CE the candidate cells that need to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information.
可选地,网络设备基于候选小区的测量结果(例如SSBRI/CRI和/或L1-RSRP)选择候选小区,例如:基于候选小区的L1-RSRP的大小选择候选小区,根据终端设备保存候选小区下行同步信息的能力值选择L1-RSRP较大的候选小区。Optionally, the network device selects a candidate cell based on the measurement results of the candidate cell (e.g., SSBRI/CRI and/or L1-RSRP), for example: selecting a candidate cell based on the size of the L1-RSRP of the candidate cell, and selecting a candidate cell with a larger L1-RSRP according to the ability value of the terminal device to save the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
可选地,网络设备基于候选小区的测量结果(例如SSBRI/CRI和/或L1-RSRP)选择目标小区,例如:基于候选小区的L1-RSRP的大小选择目标小区,L1-RSRP最大的候选小区是目标小区。Optionally, the network device selects the target cell based on the measurement results of the candidate cells (eg, SSBRI/CRI and/or L1-RSRP), for example, the target cell is selected based on the size of the L1-RSRP of the candidate cells, and the candidate cell with the largest L1-RSRP is the target cell.
可选地,MAC CE指示的候选小区个数不超过终端设备保存候选小区下行同步信息的能力值指示的候选小区个数,终端设备对MAC CE中指示的候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the number of candidate cells indicated by the MAC CE does not exceed the number of candidate cells indicated by the capability value of the terminal device for storing downlink synchronization information of the candidate cells. The terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cells indicated in the MAC CE and obtains or acquires the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cells.
参照图7,图7为根据第二实施例示出的控制方法的第一示例示意图,如图7所示,候选小区指示MAC CE可以指示最多N个候选小区,其中,N为整数。可选地,如果N小于或等于8,则候选小区指示MAC CE包含一个八位字节(即:octet);如果N大于8并且小于或等于16,则候选小区指示MAC CE包含两个八位字节,以此类推。Ci域用于指示候选小区i是否需要进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息,如果Ci域被设置为1,则表示终端设备需要对候选小区i进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区i对应的下行同步信息,和/或,如果Ci域被设置为0,表示不需要对候选小区i进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区i对应的下行同步信息或者清空候选小区i对应的下行同步信息。R是保留比特,被设置为0。Referring to FIG. 7 , FIG. 7 is a first example schematic diagram of a control method according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 7 , the candidate cell indication MAC CE can indicate a maximum of N candidate cells, where N is an integer. Optionally, if N is less than or equal to 8, the candidate cell indication MAC CE contains one eight-bit byte (i.e., octet); if N is greater than 8 and less than or equal to 16, the candidate cell indication MAC CE contains two eight-bit bytes, and so on. The Ci field is used to indicate whether the candidate cell i needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information. If the Ci field is set to 1, it indicates that the terminal device needs to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell i and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell i, and/or, if the Ci field is set to 0, it indicates that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell i and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell i or clear the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell i. R is a reserved bit, which is set to 0.
可选地,可以在待添加和修改的L1/L2候选列表信息元素(例如:Candidates-L1L2-ToAddModList-r18)配置的所有候选小区中定义附加的物理小区标识,表示附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)在待添加和修改的L1/L2候选列表信息元素配置的所有候选小区中统一编号,待添加和修改的L1/L2候选列表信息元素配置的所有候选小区,是指待添加和修改的L1/L2候选列表信息元素配置的所有待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素(例如:Candidates-L1L2-ToAddMod-r18)配置的候选小区,即:所有待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素包含的L1/L2候选小区配置参数(例如:candidates-L1L2-CellsConfig-r18)配置的候选小区,可选地,L1/L2候选小区配置参数的类型是小区组配置信息元素(例如:CellGroupConfig),可选地,候选小区包括特殊小区和/或辅小区。Optionally, an additional physical cell identifier may be defined in all candidate cells configured by the to-be-added and modified L1/L2 candidate list information element (e.g., Candidates-L1L2-ToAddModList-r18), indicating that the additional physical cell identifier parameter (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) is uniformly numbered in all candidate cells configured by the to-be-added and modified L1/L2 candidate list information element, and all candidate cells configured by the to-be-added and modified L1/L2 candidate list information element refer to the to-be-added and modified L1/L2 candidate list information element configuration. The candidate cells configured by all L1/L2 candidate information elements to be added and modified (for example: Candidates-L1L2-ToAddMod-r18), that is, the candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters (for example: candidates-L1L2-CellsConfig-r18) contained in all L1/L2 candidate information elements to be added and modified. Optionally, the type of the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters is a cell group configuration information element (for example: CellGroupConfig). Optionally, the candidate cells include special cells and/or secondary cells.
可选地,对于候选小区的附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)配置,包括在特殊小区配置(例如:SpCellConfig)信息元素中增加附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18),和/或在辅小区配置(例如:SCellConfig)信息元素中增加附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18),用于表示该候选小区的附加的物理小区标识;还可以包括在候选小区测量信号配置信息元素中增加附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)用于表示该候选小区的附加的物理小区标识。Optionally, the configuration of additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) of the candidate cell includes adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig) information element, and/or adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the secondary cell configuration (e.g., SCellConfig) information element to indicate the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell; it may also include adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element to indicate the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell.
可选地,候选小区指示MAC CE中Ci域用于指示附加的物理小区标识为i的候选小区i是否需要进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息,如果Ci域被设置为1,则表示终端设备需要对候选小区i进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息,和/或,如果Ci域被设置为0,表示不需要对候选小区i进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区i对应的下行同步信息或者清空候选小区i对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the Ci field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE is used to indicate whether the candidate cell i with the additional physical cell identifier i needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information. If the Ci field is set to 1, it means that the terminal device needs to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell i and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information, and/or, if the Ci field is set to 0, it means that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell i and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell i or clear the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell i.
可选地,候选小区i对应的特殊小区配置信息元素或辅小区配置信息元素包含的附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)的取值为i。Optionally, the value of the additional physical cell identity parameter (eg, additionalPCIIndex-r18) included in the special cell configuration information element or the secondary cell configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell i is i.
可选地,候选小区i对应的候选小区测量信号配置信息元素包含的附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)的取值为i。Optionally, the value of the additional physical cell identifier parameter (for example, additionalPCIIndex-r18) included in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell i is i.
可选地,可以在待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的所有候选小区中定义附加的物理小区标识,表示附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)在当前待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的所有的候选小区中编号,待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的所有的候选小区是指待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素包含的L1/L2候选小区配置参数(例如:candidates-L1L2-CellsConfig-r18)配置的所有候选小区,可选地,L1/L2候选小区配置参数的类型是小区组配置信息元素(例如:CellGroupConfig),可选地,候选小区包括特殊小区和/或辅小区。Optionally, an additional physical cell identifier may be defined in all candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified, indicating that the additional physical cell identifier parameter (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) is numbered in all candidate cells configured by the current L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified. All candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified refer to all candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters (e.g., candidates-L1L2-CellsConfig-r18) contained in the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified. Optionally, the type of the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters is a cell group configuration information element (e.g., CellGroupConfig). Optionally, the candidate cells include special cells and/or secondary cells.
可选地,对于候选小区的附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)配置,包括在特殊小区配置(例如:SpCellConfig)信息元素中增加附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18),和/或,在辅小区配置(例如:SCellConfig)信息元素中增加附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)用于表示该候选小区的附加的物理小区标识;还包括在候选小区测量信号配置信息元素中增加附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18),用于表示该候选小区的附加的物理小区标识。
Optionally, the configuration of additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) of the candidate cell includes adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig) information element, and/or adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the secondary cell configuration (e.g., SCellConfig) information element to indicate the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell; and also includes adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element to indicate the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell.
可选地,候选小区指示MAC CE可以指示最多M个待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的候选小区,可选地,待添加和修改的L1/L2候选列表信息元素配置最多M个待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素并且每个待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置最多N个候选小区,可选地,M和N为整数。Optionally, the candidate cell indication MAC CE may indicate candidate cells configured with up to M L1/L2 candidate information elements to be added and modified, optionally, the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified configures up to M L1/L2 candidate information elements to be added and modified and each L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified configures up to N candidate cells, optionally, M and N are integers.
可选地,候选小区指示MAC CE中Gi域用于指示L1/L2候选索引值参数(例如:candidates-L1L2-Id-r18)的取值为i的待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的候选小区是否需要进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息。如果Gi域被设置为1,则表示L1/L2候选索引值参数(例如:candidates-L1L2-Id-r18)的取值为i的待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的候选小区中至少有一个候选小区需要进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息,和/或,如果Gi域被设置为0,表示不需要对L1/L2候选索引值参数(例如:candidates-L1L2-Id-r18)的取值为i的待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息或清空L1/L2候选索引值参数(例如:candidates-L1L2-Id-r18)的取值为i的待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的候选小区对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the Gi field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE is used to indicate whether the candidate cell configured by the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified with the value i of the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (for example: candidates-L1L2-Id-r18) needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information. If the Gi domain is set to 1, it means that at least one candidate cell among the candidate cells configured with the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified and whose value is i of the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (for example, candidates-L1L2-Id-r18) needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information, and/or, if the Gi domain is set to 0, it means that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information for the candidate cell configured with the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (for example, candidates-L1L2-Id-r18) and whose value is i of the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified, or to clear the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell configured with the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified and whose value is i of the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (for example, candidates-L1L2-Id-r18).
可选地,候选小区指示MAC CE中Cj域用于指示附加的物理小区标识为j的候选小区j是否需要进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息,如果Cj域被设置为1,则表示终端设备需要对候选小区j进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息,和/或,如果Cj域被设置为0,表示不需要对候选小区j进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区j对应的下行同步信息或者清空候选小区j对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the Cj field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE is used to indicate whether the candidate cell j with the additional physical cell identifier j needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information. If the Cj field is set to 1, it means that the terminal device needs to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell j and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information, and/or, if the Cj field is set to 0, it means that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell j and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell j or clear the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell j.
可选地,候选小区j对应的特殊小区配置信息元素或辅小区配置信息元素包含的附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)的取值为j。Optionally, the value of the additional physical cell identity parameter (for example, additionalPCIIndex-r18) included in the special cell configuration information element or the secondary cell configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell j is j.
可选地,候选小区j对应的候选小区测量信号配置信息元素包含的附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)的取值为j。Optionally, the value of the additional physical cell identifier parameter (for example, additionalPCIIndex-r18) included in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell j is j.
参照图8,图8为根据第二实施例示出的控制方法的第二示例示意图,如图8所示,对于候选小区指示MAC CE的设计方法,候选小区指示MAC CE中每个Gi域对应N个Cj域,Gi域统一占用候选小区指示MAC CE的第一个八位字节,如果M大于8,Gi域继续占用候选小区指示MAC CE的第二个八位字节,以此类推,如果N大于8,每个Gi域对应的N个Cj域继续占用候选小区指示MAC CE的第二个八位字节,以此类推。例如:第二个八位字节的N个Cj域对应于G1域,第三个八位字节的N个Cj域对应于G2域。Referring to FIG8 , FIG8 is a second example schematic diagram of a control method according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG8 , for the design method of the candidate cell indication MAC CE, each Gi field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE corresponds to N Cj fields, and the Gi fields uniformly occupy the first octet of the candidate cell indication MAC CE. If M is greater than 8, the Gi field continues to occupy the second octet of the candidate cell indication MAC CE, and so on. If N is greater than 8, the N Cj fields corresponding to each Gi field continue to occupy the second octet of the candidate cell indication MAC CE, and so on. For example: the N Cj fields of the second octet correspond to the G1 field, and the N Cj fields of the third octet correspond to the G2 field.
参照图9,图9为根据第二实施例示出的控制方法的第三示例示意图,如图9所示,候选小区指示MAC CE中每个Gi域占用每个八位字节的第一个位置,每个Gi域以及对应的N个Cj域占用候选小区指示MAC CE的一个八位字节,如果(N+1)大于8,每个Gi域以及对应的N个Cj域继续占用候选小区指示MAC CE的第二个八位字节,以此类推。例如:第一个八位字节的N个Cj域对应于G1域,第二个八位字节的N个Cj域对应于G2域。Referring to FIG. 9 , FIG. 9 is a third example schematic diagram of the control method according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 9 , each Gi field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE occupies the first position of each octet, and each Gi field and the corresponding N Cj fields occupy one octet of the candidate cell indication MAC CE. If (N+1) is greater than 8, each Gi field and the corresponding N Cj fields continue to occupy the second octet of the candidate cell indication MAC CE, and so on. For example: the N Cj fields of the first octet correspond to the G1 field, and the N Cj fields of the second octet correspond to the G2 field.
可选地,如果Gi域被设置为1并且该Gi域对应的Cj域被设置为1,表示L1/L2候选索引值参数(例如:candidates-L1L2-Id-r18)的取值为i的待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的候选小区中,终端设备需要对候选小区j进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息;和/或,如果Cj域被设置为0,即包括Gi域被设置为1并且对应的Cj域被设置为0和Gi域被设置为0并且对应的Cj域也被设置为0两种情况,表示不需要对候选小区j进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息或清空候选小区j对应的下行同步信息。R是保留比特,被设置为0。Optionally, if the Gi domain is set to 1 and the Cj domain corresponding to the Gi domain is set to 1, it means that in the candidate cell configured with the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified and the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (e.g., candidates-L1L2-Id-r18) is i, the terminal device needs to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell j and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information; and/or, if the Cj domain is set to 0, that is, including the two cases that the Gi domain is set to 1 and the corresponding Cj domain is set to 0 and the Gi domain is set to 0 and the corresponding Cj domain is also set to 0, it means that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell j and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information or clear the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell j. R is a reserved bit and is set to 0.
参照图10,图10为根据第二实施例示出的控制方法的第四示例示意图,如图10所示,候选小区指示MAC CE中有M个Gi域,Gi域统一占用候选小区指示MAC CE的第一个八位字节,如果M大于8,Gi域继续占用候选小区指示MAC CE的第二个八位字节,以此类推;候选小区指示MAC CE中有N个Cj域,Cj域统一占用候选小区指示MAC CE的第二个八位字节,如果N大于8,Cj域继续占用候选小区指示MAC CE的第二个八位字节,以此类推。Referring to Figure 10, Figure 10 is a fourth example schematic diagram of the control method shown in the second embodiment. As shown in Figure 10, there are M Gi fields in the candidate cell indication MAC CE, and the Gi fields uniformly occupy the first eight-bit byte of the candidate cell indication MAC CE. If M is greater than 8, the Gi field continues to occupy the second eight-bit byte of the candidate cell indication MAC CE, and so on. There are N Cj fields in the candidate cell indication MAC CE, and the Cj fields uniformly occupy the second eight-bit byte of the candidate cell indication MAC CE. If N is greater than 8, the Cj field continues to occupy the second eight-bit byte of the candidate cell indication MAC CE, and so on.
可选地,如果一个Gi域被设置为1,则候选小区指示MAC CE中的Cj域都对应于该Gi域。如果Gi域被设置为1并且Cj域被设置为1,表示L1/L2候选索引值参数(例如:candidates-L1L2-Id-r18)的取值为i的待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的候选小区中,终端设备需要对候选小区j进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息;和/或,如果Cj域被设置为0,表示不需要对候选小区j进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息或清空候选小区j对应的下行同步信息。可选地,R是保留比特,可被设置为0。Optionally, if a Gi field is set to 1, the Cj field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE corresponds to the Gi field. If the Gi field is set to 1 and the Cj field is set to 1, it means that in the candidate cell configured with the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified and the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (for example: candidates-L1L2-Id-r18) is i, the terminal device needs to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell j and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information; and/or, if the Cj field is set to 0, it means that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell j and obtain or get the corresponding downlink synchronization information or clear the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell j. Optionally, R is a reserved bit and can be set to 0.
可选地,终端设备还可以测量候选小区的下行信号并将测量结果上报至网络设备,以供网络设备选取或确定候选小区,并通过在DCI中增加候选小区标识向终端设备指示需要进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区,终端设备对DCI中指示的候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device can also measure the downlink signal of the candidate cell and report the measurement results to the network device so that the network device can select or determine the candidate cell, and indicate to the terminal device the candidate cell that needs to be downlink synchronized and obtain or get downlink synchronization information by adding a candidate cell identifier in the DCI. The terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the DCI and obtains or gets the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过终端设备向网络设备上报终端设备保存候选小区下行同步信息的能力值,以使网络设备通过介质访问控制层控制单元指示进行下行同步的候选小区,以便于终端设备确定候选小区,进而对候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息。This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by the terminal device reporting the ability value of the terminal device to save the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell to the network device, so that the network device indicates the candidate cell for downlink synchronization through the media access control layer control unit, so that the terminal device can determine the candidate cell, and then perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information.
第三实施例Third embodiment
参照图11,图11为根据第三实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图,在本申请任一上述实施例的基础上,本实施例公开了通过DCI向终端设备指示需要进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区的具体方法。
Referring to Figure 11, Figure 11 is a flow chart of the control method shown according to the third embodiment. Based on any of the above embodiments of the present application, this embodiment discloses a specific method for indicating to a terminal device through DCI that a candidate cell needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get downlink synchronization information.
可选地,终端设备测量候选小区的下行信号,例如:同步广播块(例如:SS/PBCH block)或信道状态信息参考信号(例如:CSI-RS),并将测量结果(例如:SSBRI/CRI和/或L1-RSRP)上报至网络设备,网络设备选择候选小区,并通过在DCI(例如DCI格式1_0)中增加候选小区标识向终端设备指示需要进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区,终端设备对下行控制信息中指示的候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区对应的下行同步信息,可选地,该下行控制信息用于由PDCCH order发起的随机接入过程,终端设备通过在下行控制信息中的候选小区标识得到该物理下行控制信道命令触发其向该候选小区进行物理随机接入信道(PRACH,Physical Random Access Channel)传输,从而实现上行同步。Optionally, the terminal device measures the downlink signal of the candidate cell, such as the synchronization broadcast block (e.g., SS/PBCH block) or the channel state information reference signal (e.g., CSI-RS), and reports the measurement result (e.g., SSBRI/CRI and/or L1-RSRP) to the network device. The network device selects the candidate cell and indicates to the terminal device the candidate cell that needs to be downlink synchronized and obtain or get downlink synchronization information by adding the candidate cell identifier in the DCI (e.g., DCI format 1_0). The terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the downlink control information and obtains or gets the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell. Optionally, the downlink control information is used for the random access process initiated by the PDCCH order. The terminal device obtains the physical downlink control channel command by the candidate cell identifier in the downlink control information to trigger it to perform physical random access channel (PRACH, Physical Random Access Channel) transmission to the candidate cell, thereby achieving uplink synchronization.
可选地,可以在待添加和修改的L1/L2候选列表信息元素配置的所有候选小区中定义附加的物理小区标识,表示附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)在待添加和修改的L1/L2候选列表信息元素配置的所有候选小区中统一编号,待添加和修改的L1/L2候选列表信息元素配置的所有候选小区是指待添加和修改的L1/L2候选列表信息元素配置的所有待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的候选小区,即:所有待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素包含的L1/L2候选小区配置参数配置的候选小区,可选地,L1/L2候选小区配置参数的类型是小区组配置信息元素,可选地,候选小区包括特殊小区和/或辅小区。Optionally, an additional physical cell identifier may be defined in all candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified, indicating that the additional physical cell identifier parameter (for example: additionalPCIIndex-r18) is uniformly numbered in all candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified. All candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified refer to candidate cells configured by all L1/L2 candidate information elements to be added and modified configured by the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified, that is, candidate cells configured by L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters contained in all L1/L2 candidate information elements to be added and modified. Optionally, the type of the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameter is a cell group configuration information element. Optionally, the candidate cells include special cells and/or secondary cells.
可选地,在下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中增加一个附加的物理小区标识域,或使用下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中的保留比特作为附加的物理小区标识域,终端设备根据附加的物理小区标识域的取值选择或确定一个候选小区的附加的物理小区标识,并对该候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息。可选地,保存或更新下行同步信息后,终端设备根据物理下行控制信道命令指示信息向该候选小区进行物理随机接入信道传输,从而实现上行同步。Optionally, an additional physical cell identification field is added to the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0), or a reserved bit in the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0) is used as an additional physical cell identification field, and the terminal device selects or determines an additional physical cell identification of a candidate cell according to the value of the additional physical cell identification field, and performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtains or obtains the corresponding downlink synchronization information. Optionally, after saving or updating the downlink synchronization information, the terminal device performs physical random access channel transmission to the candidate cell according to the physical downlink control channel command indication information, thereby achieving uplink synchronization.
可选地,在下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中增加一个附加的物理小区标识域,或使用下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中的保留比特作为附加的物理小区标识域,终端设备根据附加的物理小区标识域的取值选择或确定一个候选小区的附加的物理小区标识,根据候选小区的附加的物理小区标识从待添加和修改的L1/L2候选列表信息元素中配置的候选小区中选择或确定一个候选小区。Optionally, an additional physical cell identifier field is added to the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0), or the reserved bits in the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0) are used as the additional physical cell identifier field, and the terminal device selects or determines an additional physical cell identifier of a candidate cell according to the value of the additional physical cell identifier field, and selects or determines a candidate cell from the candidate cells configured in the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified according to the additional physical cell identifier of the candidate cell.
可选地,对于候选小区的附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)配置,包括在特殊小区配置(例如:SpCellConfig)信息元素中增加附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18),和/或在辅小区配置(例如:SCellConfig)信息元素中增加附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)用于表示该候选小区的附加的物理小区标识;还可以包括在候选小区测量信号配置信息元素中增加附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)用于表示该候选小区的附加的物理小区标识。Optionally, the configuration of additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) of the candidate cell includes adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig) information element, and/or adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the secondary cell configuration (e.g., SCellConfig) information element to indicate the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell; it may also include adding additional physical cell identification parameters (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element to indicate the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备根据下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中附加的物理小区标识域的取值选择或确定一个候选小区的附加的物理小区标识,根据候选小区的附加的物理小区标识从待添加和修改的L1/L2候选列表信息元素中配置的候选小区中选择或确定一个候选小区,并对候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device selects or determines an additional physical cell identifier of a candidate cell based on the value of the additional physical cell identifier field in the downlink control information (for example: DCI format 1_0), selects or determines a candidate cell from the candidate cells configured in the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified based on the additional physical cell identifier of the candidate cell, performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtains or gets the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
可选地,下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中附加的物理小区标识域的取值与该候选小区对应的特殊小区配置信息元素或辅小区配置信息元素包含的附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)的取值相等;Optionally, the value of the additional physical cell identifier field in the downlink control information (for example, DCI format 1_0) is equal to the value of the additional physical cell identifier parameter (for example, additionalPCIIndex-r18) contained in the special cell configuration information element or the secondary cell configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell;
可选地,下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中附加的物理小区标识域的取值与该候选小区对应的候选小区测量信号配置信息元素包含的附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)的取值相等。Optionally, the value of the additional physical cell identifier field in the downlink control information (eg, DCI format 1_0) is equal to the value of the additional physical cell identifier parameter (eg, additionalPCIIndex-r18) included in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell.
可选地,保存或更新下行同步信息后,终端设备根据物理下行控制信道命令指示信息向该候选小区进行物理随机接入信道传输,从而实现上行同步。Optionally, after saving or updating the downlink synchronization information, the terminal device performs physical random access channel transmission to the candidate cell according to the physical downlink control channel command indication information, thereby achieving uplink synchronization.
可选地,在下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中增加一个下行同步判定域,或使用下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中的保留比特作为下行同步判定域,可选地,这两种方法得到的下行同步判定域的位宽都是1比特,该下行同步判定域用于指示终端设备是否对候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息。如果该域取值为1表示需要对候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息,和/或,如果该域取值为0表示不需要对候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, a downlink synchronization determination field is added to the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0), or a reserved bit in the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0) is used as the downlink synchronization determination field. Optionally, the bit width of the downlink synchronization determination field obtained by these two methods is 1 bit, and the downlink synchronization determination field is used to indicate whether the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtains or obtains the corresponding downlink synchronization information. If the value of this field is 1, it indicates that it is necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtain or obtain the corresponding downlink synchronization information, and/or, if the value of this field is 0, it indicates that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtain or obtain the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
可选地,可以在待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的所有候选小区中定义附加的物理小区标识,表示附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)在当前待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的所有的候选小区中编号,待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的所有的候选小区是指待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素包含的L1/L2候选小区配置参数(例如:candidates-L1L2-CellsConfig-r18)配置的所有候选小区,可选地,L1/L2候选小区配置参数的类型是小区组配置信息元素,可选地,候选小区包括特殊小区和/或辅小区。Optionally, an additional physical cell identifier may be defined in all candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified, indicating that the additional physical cell identifier parameter (for example, additionalPCIIndex-r18) is numbered in all candidate cells configured by the current L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified. All candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified refer to all candidate cells configured by the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters (for example, candidates-L1L2-CellsConfig-r18) contained in the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified. Optionally, the type of the L1/L2 candidate cell configuration parameters is a cell group configuration information element. Optionally, the candidate cells include special cells and/or secondary cells.
可选地,在下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中增加一个L1/L2候选索引值域,或使用下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中的保留比特作为L1/L2候选索引值域,终端设备根据该L1/L2候选索引值域的取值从待添加和修改的L1/L2候选列表信息元素中选择或确定一个待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素,即:L1/L2候选索引值域的取值与该待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素的L1/L2候选索引值参数(例如:candidates-L1L2-Id-r18)的取值相同。Optionally, an L1/L2 candidate index value field is added to the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0), or the reserved bits in the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0) are used as the L1/L2 candidate index value field, and the terminal device selects or determines an L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified from the L1/L2 candidate list information element to be added and modified according to the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value field, that is, the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value field is the same as the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value parameter (e.g., candidates-L1L2-Id-r18) of the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified.
可选地,在下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中增加一个附加的物理小区标识域,或使用下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中的保留比特作为附加的物理小区标识域,终端设备根据附加的物理小区标识域的取值选择或确定一个候选小区的附加的物理小区标识,根据候选小区的附加的物理小区标识从L1/L2候选索引值域的取值对应的待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素配置的所有的候选小区中选择或确定一个候选小区。对于候选小区的附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)配置:
Optionally, an additional physical cell identification field is added to the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0), or a reserved bit in the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0) is used as an additional physical cell identification field. The terminal device selects or determines an additional physical cell identification of a candidate cell according to the value of the additional physical cell identification field, and selects or determines a candidate cell from all candidate cells configured with the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified corresponding to the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value field according to the additional physical cell identification of the candidate cell. For the configuration of the additional physical cell identification parameters of the candidate cell (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18):
可选地,在特殊小区配置(例如:SpCellConfig)信息元素中增加附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)和/或辅小区配置(例如:SCellConfig)信息元素中增加附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)用于表示该候选小区的附加的物理小区标识;Optionally, an additional physical cell identifier parameter (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) is added to a special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig) information element and/or an additional physical cell identifier parameter (e.g., additionalPCIIndex-r18) is added to a secondary cell configuration (e.g., SCellConfig) information element to indicate an additional physical cell identifier of the candidate cell;
可选地,在候选小区测量信号配置信息元素中增加附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)用于表示该候选小区的附加的物理小区标识。Optionally, an additional physical cell identifier parameter (eg, additionalPCIIndex-r18) is added to the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element to indicate an additional physical cell identifier of the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备根据L1/L2候选索引值域的取值选取或确定待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素,根据下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中附加的物理小区标识域的取值选择或确定一个候选小区的附加的物理小区标识,根据候选小区的附加的物理小区标识从待添加和修改的L1/L2候选信息元素中配置的候选小区中选择或确定一个候选小区,并对候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device selects or determines the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified according to the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value field, selects or determines the additional physical cell identifier of a candidate cell according to the value of the additional physical cell identifier field in the downlink control information (for example: DCI format 1_0), selects or determines a candidate cell from the candidate cells configured in the L1/L2 candidate information element to be added and modified according to the additional physical cell identifier of the candidate cell, performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtains or obtains the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
可选地,下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中附加的物理小区标识域的取值与该候选小区对应的特殊小区配置信息元素或辅小区配置信息元素包含的附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)的取值相等;Optionally, the value of the additional physical cell identifier field in the downlink control information (for example, DCI format 1_0) is equal to the value of the additional physical cell identifier parameter (for example, additionalPCIIndex-r18) contained in the special cell configuration information element or the secondary cell configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell;
可选地,下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中附加的物理小区标识域的取值与该候选小区对应的候选小区测量信号配置信息元素包含的附加的物理小区标识参数(例如:additionalPCIIndex-r18)的取值相等。Optionally, the value of the additional physical cell identifier field in the downlink control information (eg, DCI format 1_0) is equal to the value of the additional physical cell identifier parameter (eg, additionalPCIIndex-r18) included in the candidate cell measurement signal configuration information element corresponding to the candidate cell.
可选地,保存或更新下行同步信息后,终端设备根据物理下行控制信道命令指示信息向该候选小区进行物理随机接入信道传输,从而实现上行同步。Optionally, after saving or updating the downlink synchronization information, the terminal device performs physical random access channel transmission to the candidate cell according to the physical downlink control channel command indication information, thereby achieving uplink synchronization.
可选地,在下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中增加一个下行同步判定域,或使用下行控制信息(例如:DCI格式1_0)中的保留比特作为下行同步判定域,可选地,这两种方法得到的下行同步判定域的位宽都是1比特,该下行同步判定域用于指示终端设备是否对候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息。如果该域取值为1表示需要对候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息,和/或,如果该域取值为0表示不需要对候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, a downlink synchronization determination field is added to the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0), or a reserved bit in the downlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0) is used as the downlink synchronization determination field. Optionally, the bit width of the downlink synchronization determination field obtained by these two methods is 1 bit, and the downlink synchronization determination field is used to indicate whether the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtains or obtains the corresponding downlink synchronization information. If the value of this field is 1, it indicates that it is necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtain or obtain the corresponding downlink synchronization information, and/or, if the value of this field is 0, it indicates that it is not necessary to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtain or obtain the corresponding downlink synchronization information.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过终端设备测量候选小区的下行信号,并将测量结果上报至网络设备,以使网络设备通过下行控制信息指示进行下行同步的候选小区,以便于终端设备确定候选小区,进而对候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息。This embodiment uses the above scheme, specifically by measuring the downlink signal of the candidate cell through the terminal device, and reporting the measurement result to the network device, so that the network device indicates the candidate cell for downlink synchronization through downlink control information, so that the terminal device can determine the candidate cell, and then perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and obtain or get the downlink synchronization information.
第四实施例Fourth embodiment
参照图12,图12为根据第四实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图,在本申请任一上述实施例的基础上,本实施例公开了终端设备确定获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区的具体方法。Referring to Figure 12, Figure 12 is a flow chart of a control method according to the fourth embodiment. Based on any of the above embodiments of the present application, this embodiment discloses a specific method for a terminal device to determine a candidate cell for acquiring or obtaining downlink synchronization information.
可选地,终端设备根据下行信号确定候选小区的测量结果,获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device determines the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, and obtains or acquires the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions.
可选地,满足预设条件包括:候选小区的测量结果的偏移值大于或等于源小区的测量结果,和/或,候选小区的测量结果大于或等于预设门限值。Optionally, satisfying the preset condition includes: an offset value of a measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a measurement result of the source cell, and/or the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value.
可选地,终端设备测量候选小区的下行信号,例如:同步广播块(例如:SS/PBCH block)或信道状态信息参考信号(例如:CSI-RS),并将满足预设条件的候选小区的测量结果(例如:SSBRI/CRI、L1-RSRP、L1-SINR)上报至网络设备,并获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device measures the downlink signal of the candidate cell, such as the synchronization broadcast block (e.g., SS/PBCH block) or the channel state information reference signal (e.g., CSI-RS), and reports the measurement results of the candidate cell that meets the preset conditions (e.g., SSBRI/CRI, L1-RSRP, L1-SINR) to the network device, and obtains or gets the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
可选地,满足预设条件是候选小区的测量结果(例如:L1-RSRP、L1-SINR)的偏移值比源小区的测量结果好,例如:(Measurement候选小区i—offset≥Measurement源小区),可选地,偏移值可以是RRC配置值、默认值。如果候选小区i的测量结果满足预设条件,则终端设备上报候选小区i的测量结果(例如:SSBRI/CRI、L1-RSRP、L1-SINR),并获取或得到候选小区i的下行同步信息。Optionally, the preset condition is met when the offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell (e.g., L1-RSRP, L1-SINR) is better than the measurement result of the source cell, for example: (Measurement candidate cell i— offset ≥ Measurement source cell ), and optionally, the offset value may be an RRC configuration value or a default value. If the measurement result of the candidate cell i meets the preset condition, the terminal device reports the measurement result of the candidate cell i (e.g., SSBRI/CRI, L1-RSRP, L1-SINR), and obtains or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell i.
可选地,满足预设条件是候选小区的测量结果(例如:L1-RSRP、L1-SINR)比预设门限高,例如:(Measurement候选小区i≥Threshold),可选地,预设门限可以是RRC配置、默认值。如果候选小区i的测量结果满足预设条件,则终端设备上报候选小区i的测量结果(例如:SSBRI/CRI、L1-RSRP、L1-SINR),并获取或得到候选小区i的下行同步信息。Optionally, the preset condition is met when the measurement result of the candidate cell (e.g., L1-RSRP, L1-SINR) is higher than a preset threshold, for example: (Measurement candidate cell i ≥ Threshold), and optionally, the preset threshold may be an RRC configuration or a default value. If the measurement result of the candidate cell i meets the preset condition, the terminal device reports the measurement result of the candidate cell i (e.g., SSBRI/CRI, L1-RSRP, L1-SINR), and obtains or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell i.
可选地,如果满足预设条件的候选小区个数(例如:M)大于终端设备保存候选小区下行同步信息的能力值指示的候选小区个数(例如:N),终端设备则对这些预设条件的候选小区按照预设方式排列,并将前N个候选小区的测量结果(例如:SSBRI/CRI、L1-RSRP、L1-SINR)上报给网络设备,并获取或得到这N个候选小区的下行同步信息。其中,预设方式可以是按照候选小区的L1测量结果(例如:L1-RSRP、L1-SINR)的大小排列。Optionally, if the number of candidate cells that meet the preset conditions (e.g., M) is greater than the number of candidate cells indicated by the terminal device's ability to store downlink synchronization information of the candidate cells (e.g., N), the terminal device arranges the candidate cells of these preset conditions in a preset manner, and reports the measurement results of the first N candidate cells (e.g., SSBRI/CRI, L1-RSRP, L1-SINR) to the network device, and obtains or gets the downlink synchronization information of these N candidate cells. The preset manner may be to arrange the candidate cells according to the size of the L1 measurement results (e.g., L1-RSRP, L1-SINR).
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过终端设备根据下行信号确定候选小区的测量结果,获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息,提供了终端设备确定获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区的方案,以便于终端设备基于确定的候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息。This embodiment adopts the above-mentioned scheme, specifically, the terminal device determines the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, obtains or obtains the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions, and provides a scheme for the terminal device to determine the candidate cell for obtaining or obtaining the downlink synchronization information, so that the terminal device can perform downlink synchronization based on the determined candidate cell and obtain or obtain the downlink synchronization information.
第五实施例Fifth embodiment
在上述任一实施例的基础上,本实施例公开了步骤S3基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息的具体方法。参照图13,图13为根据第五实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图,示出了步骤S3的具体步骤包括以下至少一项:Based on any of the above embodiments, this embodiment discloses a specific method for obtaining or acquiring downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information in step S3. Referring to FIG. 13 , FIG. 13 is a flow chart of a control method according to the fifth embodiment, showing that the specific steps of step S3 include at least one of the following:
S31:根据候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元和/或下行控制信息选取或确定候选小区,获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息;S31: Select or determine a candidate cell according to the medium access control layer control unit indicated by the candidate cell and/or the downlink control information, and acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
可选地,终端设备确定候选小区,以对候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device determines a candidate cell to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell and acquire or obtain corresponding downlink synchronization information.
可选地,候选小区指示MAC CE中Ci域被设置为1,则表示需要对候选小区i进行下行同步并获取或
得到候选小区i对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, if the Ci field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE is set to 1, it means that the candidate cell i needs to be synchronized downlink and acquired or Get the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell i.
可选地,候选小区指示MAC CE中Gi域被设置为1并且该Gi域对应的Cj域被设置为1,对候选小区j进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the Gi field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE is set to 1 and the Cj field corresponding to the Gi field is set to 1, downlink synchronization is performed on the candidate cell j and the corresponding downlink synchronization information is acquired or obtained.
可选地,候选小区指示MAC CE中Gi域被设置为1并且Cj域被设置为1,对候选小区j进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the Gi field in the candidate cell indication MAC CE is set to 1 and the Cj field is set to 1, downlink synchronization is performed on the candidate cell j and the corresponding downlink synchronization information is acquired or obtained.
可选地,根据下行控制信息中L1/L2候选索引值域和/或附加的物理小区标识域的取值选择或确定一个候选小区,并对该候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, a candidate cell is selected or determined according to the value of the L1/L2 candidate index value field and/or the additional physical cell identification field in the downlink control information, and downlink synchronization is performed on the candidate cell and corresponding downlink synchronization information is acquired or obtained.
S32:根据下行信号确定候选小区的测量结果,获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息。S32: Determine the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, and obtain or acquire the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset condition.
可选地,对测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区,终端设备上报候选小区的测量结果,并获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, for a candidate cell whose measurement result meets a preset condition, the terminal device reports the measurement result of the candidate cell, and acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
可选地,满足预设条件包括:候选小区的测量结果的偏移值大于或等于源小区的测量结果,和/或,候选小区的测量结果大于或等于预设门限值。Optionally, satisfying the preset condition includes: an offset value of a measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a measurement result of the source cell, and/or the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value.
可选地,获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,包括:基于预设规则,根据参考小区的时间单元获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, acquiring or obtaining downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes: acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to a time unit of a reference cell based on a preset rule.
可选地,参考小区包括源小区、与候选小区在相同的频率载波上且已被检测出的小区、候选小区对应小区组的特殊小区以及网络设备配置的参考小区中的至少一项。Optionally, the reference cell includes at least one of a source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of a cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by the network device.
可选地,预设规则包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the preset rule includes at least one of the following:
候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时隙数由时隙数域的取值决定;The number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field;
候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定;The number of symbols contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field;
候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数由采样间隔数域的取值和/或采样间隔数因子决定。The number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the sampling interval number field and/or the sampling interval number factor.
可选地,根据参考小区的时间单元边界以及候选小区的定时关系获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,使用时间单元数量指示候选小区的下行同步信息,候选小区的下行同步信息包括以下至少一个域:候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域、频率内候选小区判定域、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域,终端设备根据以上至少一个域的取值确定候选小区的帧边界。Optionally, the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell is acquired or obtained based on the time unit boundary of the reference cell and the timing relationship of the candidate cell, and the number of time units is used to indicate the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell. The downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes at least one of the following fields: a candidate cell identification field, an advance-to-reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field. The terminal device determines the frame boundary of the candidate cell based on the value of at least one of the above fields.
可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的子帧数由子帧数域的取值决定。Optionally, the number of subframes included in the time difference between frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the subframe number field.
可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差,除了子帧数域的取值指示的子帧数之外,包含的时隙数由时隙数域的取值决定。Optionally, the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell, in addition to the number of subframes indicated by the value of the subframe number field, includes a number of time slots determined by the value of the time slot number field.
可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时隙数由时隙数域的取值决定。Optionally, the number of time slots included in the time difference between frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field.
可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差,除了子帧数域的取值指示的子帧数和时隙数域的取值指示的时隙数之外,包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定。Optionally, the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell, in addition to the number of subframes indicated by the value of the subframe number field and the number of time slots indicated by the value of the time slot number field, includes the number of symbols determined by the value of the symbol number field.
可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差,除了时隙数域的取值指示的时隙数之外,包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定。Optionally, the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell, in addition to the number of time slots indicated by the value of the time slot number field, includes a number of symbols determined by the value of the symbol number field.
可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定。Optionally, the number of symbols included in the time difference between frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field.
可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数是M·K·TC或M·K·TS。Optionally, the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is M·K· TC or M·K· TS .
可选地,候选小区的定时关系由参考小区的定时关系确定,候选小区的时间单元边界与参考小区对应的时间单元边界对齐。Optionally, the timing relationship of the candidate cell is determined by the timing relationship of the reference cell, and the time unit boundary of the candidate cell is aligned with the time unit boundary corresponding to the reference cell.
可选地,候选小区的定时关系由参考小区的定时关系确定,可选地,候选小区的时间单元边界与参考小区对应的时间单元边界对齐。Optionally, the timing relationship of the candidate cell is determined by the timing relationship of the reference cell. Optionally, the time unit boundary of the candidate cell is aligned with the time unit boundary corresponding to the reference cell.
可选地,终端设备根据参考小区的定时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值,终端设备检测或接收同步广播块,根据检测或接收到的同步广播块以及对应的同步广播块索引值确定候选小区的定时关系。Optionally, the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell based on the timing relationship of the reference cell, and the terminal device detects or receives the synchronization broadcast block, and determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell based on the detected or received synchronization broadcast block and the corresponding synchronization broadcast block index value.
可选地,终端设备从网络设备接收到指示信息时,根据指示信息选择或确定候选小区,再根据候选小区的下行同步信息以及参考小区的时序关系确定候选小区的时序关系,即:确定候选小区的时间单元(例如:帧、子帧、时隙)边界。Optionally, when the terminal device receives indication information from the network device, it selects or determines the candidate cell based on the indication information, and then determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell based on the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell and the timing relationship of the reference cell, that is, determines the time unit (for example: frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell.
可选地,指示信息可以是物理下行控制信道命令和/或小区切换命令。Optionally, the indication information may be a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过根据候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元和/或下行控制信息选取或确定候选小区,获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息;根据下行信号确定候选小区的测量结果,获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息,通过候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元、下行控制信息及下行信号中的至少一项确定候选小区,并获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,使终端设备在接收到小区切换命令之前即可确定需要获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区,并基于第一下行信息进行下行同步操作,减少接收到小区切换命令之后的等待时间,从而降低小区切换过程中的时延。This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by selecting or determining a candidate cell according to the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit and/or downlink control information, and acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell; determining the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions, determining the candidate cell through at least one of the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and downlink signal, and acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, so that the terminal device can determine the candidate cell whose downlink synchronization information needs to be acquired or obtained before receiving the cell switching command, and perform the downlink synchronization operation based on the first downlink information, thereby reducing the waiting time after receiving the cell switching command, thereby reducing the delay in the cell switching process.
第六实施例Sixth embodiment
在上述任一实施例的基础上,本实施例进一步公开了前述实施例中的控制方法。Based on any of the above embodiments, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
可选地,终端设备基于候选小区的同步广播块对候选小区进行下行同步,可选地,终端设备检测和/或接收候选小区的同步广播块,确定候选小区的定时关系,即:确定候选小区的时间单元(例如:帧、子帧、时隙)边界。Optionally, the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the synchronization broadcast block of the candidate cell. Optionally, the terminal device detects and/or receives the synchronization broadcast block of the candidate cell to determine the timing relationship of the candidate cell, that is, determines the boundary of the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) of the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备可以根据参考小区的时间单元边界以及候选小区的定时关系获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息。
Optionally, the terminal device may acquire or obtain the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to the time unit boundary of the reference cell and the timing relationship of the candidate cell.
可选地,参考小区可以通过频率内(intra-frequency)的候选小区选取或确定,也可以通过频率间(inter-frequency)的候选小区选取或确定。Optionally, the reference cell may be selected or determined through intra-frequency candidate cells, or may be selected or determined through inter-frequency candidate cells.
可选地,服务小区公共配置信息元素(例如:ServingCellConfigCommon)中同步广播块绝对频率域(例如:absoluteFrequencySSB)和子载波间隔域(例如:subcarrierSpacing)的取值分别等于候选小区的同步广播块频率和同步广播块子载波间隔,则认为源小区与候选小区在相同的频率载波上,该候选小区也称为频率内的候选小区。可选地,参考小区为源小区,即:当前的服务小区。Optionally, if the values of the absolute frequency domain (e.g., absoluteFrequencySSB) and subcarrier spacing domain (e.g., subcarrierSpacing) of the synchronous broadcast block in the common configuration information element of the serving cell (e.g., ServingCellConfigCommon) are equal to the synchronous broadcast block frequency and the synchronous broadcast block subcarrier spacing of the candidate cell, respectively, the source cell is considered to be on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell, and the candidate cell is also referred to as a candidate cell within the frequency. Optionally, the reference cell is the source cell, that is, the current serving cell.
可选地,服务小区公共配置信息元素中同步广播块绝对频率域(例如:absoluteFrequencySSB)的取值与候选小区的同步广播块频率不相等,则认为源小区与候选小区不在相同的频率载波上,该候选小区也称为频率间的候选小区。可选地,参考小区为源小区,即:当前的服务小区。Optionally, if the value of the absolute frequency domain of the synchronization broadcast block (e.g., absoluteFrequencySSB) in the common configuration information element of the serving cell is not equal to the synchronization broadcast block frequency of the candidate cell, it is considered that the source cell and the candidate cell are not on the same frequency carrier, and the candidate cell is also called an inter-frequency candidate cell. Optionally, the reference cell is the source cell, that is, the current serving cell.
可选地,参考小区与候选小区在相同的频率载波上,并且是已经检测出的小区,即:已经完成同步的小区。Optionally, the reference cell and the candidate cell are on the same frequency carrier and are detected cells, that is, cells that have completed synchronization.
可选地,参考小区是候选小区对应小区组的特殊小区,可选地,如果候选小区对应小区组是主小区组(例如:MCG),则参考小区是主小区(例如:PCell);如果候选小区对应小区组是辅小区组(例如:SCG),则参考小区是主辅小区(例如:PSCell)。Optionally, the reference cell is a special cell of the cell group corresponding to the candidate cell. Optionally, if the cell group corresponding to the candidate cell is a main cell group (e.g., MCG), the reference cell is a main cell (e.g., PCell); if the cell group corresponding to the candidate cell is a secondary cell group (e.g., SCG), the reference cell is a main secondary cell (e.g., PSCell).
可选地,参考小区由网络设备配置,可选地,在RRC增加参考小区索引值域,或者,使用NR测量对象信息元素(例如:MeasObjectNR)中从服务小区获得SSB索引值域(例如:deriveSSB-IndexFromCellInter-r17),终端设备根据以上至少一个域得到参考小区。Optionally, the reference cell is configured by a network device. Optionally, a reference cell index value field is added to the RRC, or the SSB index value field is obtained from the serving cell (for example, deriveSSB-IndexFromCellInter-r17) using the NR measurement object information element (for example, MeasObjectNR). The terminal device obtains the reference cell based on at least one of the above fields.
可选地,终端设备获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息包括以下至少一个域:候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域、频率内候选小区判定域、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域。Optionally, the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell including at least one of the following fields: candidate cell identification field, advance reference cell determination field, intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, subframe number field, time slot number field, symbol number field and sampling interval number field.
可选地,候选小区标识域包括以下至少一项:特殊小区的服务小区索引值(例如:servCellIndex)、辅小区的辅小区索引值(例如:sCellIndex)、物理小区标识(例如:PCI)、层1/层2候选索引值以及附加的物理小区标识。Optionally, the candidate cell identification field includes at least one of the following: a serving cell index value of a special cell (e.g., servCellIndex), a secondary cell index value of a secondary cell (e.g., sCellIndex), a physical cell identifier (e.g., PCI), a layer 1/layer 2 candidate index value, and an additional physical cell identifier.
可选地,对于提前于参考小区判定域,提前于参考小区判定域为1比特,如果提前于参考小区判定域取值为1或者使能,表示候选小区时间单元(例如:帧、子帧、时隙、符号)提前于参考小区的相同编号的时间单元,例如:候选小区的一个帧提前于参考小区的相同编号的帧;和/或,如果提前于参考小区判定域取值为0或者不使能,表示候选小区时间单元落后于参考小区的相同编号的时间单元,例如:候选小区的一个帧落后于参考小区的相同编号的帧。Optionally, for the decision field ahead of the reference cell, the decision field ahead of the reference cell is 1 bit. If the decision field ahead of the reference cell takes a value of 1 or is enabled, it indicates that the candidate cell time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot, symbol) is ahead of the time unit with the same number of the reference cell, for example, a frame of the candidate cell is ahead of the frame with the same number of the reference cell; and/or, if the decision field ahead of the reference cell takes a value of 0 or is not enabled, it indicates that the candidate cell time unit lags behind the time unit with the same number of the reference cell, for example, a frame of the candidate cell lags behind the frame with the same number of the reference cell.
可选地,对于频率内候选小区判定域,频率内候选小区判定域为1比特,如果频率内候选小区判定域取值为1或者使能,表示候选小区是频率内的候选小区,候选小区与参考小区在相同的频率载波上;和/或,如果频率内候选小区判定域取值为0或者不使能,表示候选小区是频率间的候选小区,候选小区与参考小区不在相同的频率载波上。Optionally, for the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain, the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain is 1 bit. If the value of the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain is 1 or enabled, it indicates that the candidate cell is an intra-frequency candidate cell, and the candidate cell and the reference cell are on the same frequency carrier; and/or, if the value of the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain is 0 or not enabled, it indicates that the candidate cell is an inter-frequency candidate cell, and the candidate cell and the reference cell are not on the same frequency carrier.
可选地,对于子帧数域,子帧数域为X比特,X是整数,表示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧(例如:frame)之间时间差包含的子帧(例如:subframe)数,例如:子帧数域有2比特,子帧数域取值为0/1/2/3分别表示子帧数为0/1/2/3个。可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的子帧数由子帧数域的取值决定,例如:如果子帧数域的取值为1,表示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的子帧数为1个。Optionally, for the subframe number field, the subframe number field is X bits, X is an integer, indicating the number of subframes (e.g., subframes) included in the time difference between the frames (e.g., frame) with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell, for example: the subframe number field has 2 bits, and the subframe number field value is 0/1/2/3, indicating that the number of subframes is 0/1/2/3 respectively. Optionally, the number of subframes included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the subframe number field, for example: if the value of the subframe number field is 1, it indicates that the number of subframes included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is 1.
可选地,对于时隙数域,时隙数域为Y比特,Y是整数,表示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时隙(例如:slot)数,例如:时隙数域有2比特,时隙数域取值为0/1/2/3分别表示时隙数为0/1/2/3个。Optionally, for the time slot number field, the time slot number field is Y bits, where Y is an integer, representing the number of time slots (e.g., slots) included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell. For example, the time slot number field has 2 bits, and the values of the time slot number field are 0/1/2/3, respectively indicating that the number of time slots is 0/1/2/3.
可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差,除了子帧数域的取值指示的子帧数之外,包含的时隙数由时隙数域的取值决定。参照图14,图14为根据第七实施例示出的控制方法的第一示例示意图,如图14所示,如果时隙数域的取值为1,表示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差,除了子帧数域的取值指示的子帧数之外,包含的时隙数为1个。Optionally, the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell, in addition to the number of subframes indicated by the value of the subframe number field, includes a number of time slots determined by the value of the time slot number field. Referring to Figure 14, Figure 14 is a first example schematic diagram of a control method according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in Figure 14, if the value of the time slot number field is 1, it means that the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell, in addition to the number of subframes indicated by the value of the subframe number field, includes 1 time slot.
可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时隙数由时隙数域的取值决定。参照图15,图15为根据第七实施例示出的控制方法的第二示例示意图,如图15所示,如果时隙数域的取值为1,表示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时隙数为1个。Optionally, the number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field. Referring to Figure 15, Figure 15 is a second example schematic diagram of a control method according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in Figure 15, if the value of the time slot number field is 1, it means that the number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is 1.
可选地,对于符号数域,符号数域为Z比特,Z是整数,表示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的符号(例如:symbol)数,例如:符号数域有2比特,符号数域取值为0/1/2/3分别表示符号数为0/1/2/3个。可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差,除了子帧数域的取值指示的子帧数和时隙数域的取值指示的时隙数之外,包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定,具体可参照图14。Optionally, for the symbol number field, the symbol number field is Z bits, where Z is an integer, indicating the number of symbols (e.g., symbol) contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell. For example, the symbol number field has 2 bits, and the symbol number field value is 0/1/2/3, indicating that the number of symbols is 0/1/2/3, respectively. Optionally, the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell, in addition to the number of subframes indicated by the value of the subframe number field and the number of time slots indicated by the value of the time slot number field, contains the number of symbols determined by the value of the symbol number field. For details, please refer to Figure 14.
可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差,除了时隙数域的取值指示的时隙数之外,包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定,例如:如果符号数域的取值为1,表示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差,除了时隙数域的取值指示的时隙数之外,包含的符号数为1个,具体可参照图15。Optionally, the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell, in addition to the number of time slots indicated by the value of the time slot number field, includes the number of symbols determined by the value of the symbol number field. For example, if the value of the symbol number field is 1, it indicates that the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell, in addition to the number of time slots indicated by the value of the time slot number field, includes 1 symbol. Please refer to Figure 15 for details.
可选地,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定。参照图16,图16为根据第七实施例示出的控制方法的第三示例示意图,如图16所示,如果符号数域的取值为1,表示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的符号数为1个。Optionally, the number of symbols included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field. Referring to Figure 16, Figure 16 is a third example schematic diagram of a control method according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in Figure 16, if the value of the symbol number field is 1, it means that the number of symbols included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is 1.
可选地,对于采样间隔数域,采样间隔数域为L比特,L是整数,用于指示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔(例如:Ts或Tc)数,可选地,Tc=1/(Δfmax·Nf),其中,Δfmax=480·103Hz和Nf=4096;Ts=1/(Δfref·Nf.ref),可选地,Δfref=15·103Hz和Nf.ref=2048。候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数是M·K·TC或M·K·TS,其中,M是采样间隔数域的取值,K为采
样间隔数因子。对于采样间隔数域的取值M,例如:采样间隔数域有2比特,采样间隔数域取值为0/1/2/3,分别表示M的取值为0/1/2/3。对于采样间隔数因子K,采样间隔数因子K的取值可以由以下至少一种方式确定:K的取值由网络设备通过RRC/MAC CE/DCI信令配置、K的取值是一个默认值、K的取值是一个默认值并且与子载波间隔相关、K的取值是根据终端设备能力确定的值;可选地,K的取值为1,表示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数是M·TC或M·TS,即:直接通过采样间隔数域的取值决定采样间隔数。Optionally, for the sampling interval number field, the sampling interval number field is L bits, L is an integer, and is used to indicate the number of sampling intervals (e.g., Ts or Tc) included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell. Optionally, Tc = 1/( Δfmax · Nf ), where Δfmax = 480· 103 Hz and Nf = 4096; Ts = 1/( Δfref · Nf.ref ), where Δfref = 15· 103 Hz and Nf.ref = 2048. The number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is M·K· TC or M·K· TS , where M is the value of the sampling interval number field, and K is the sampling interval. Sampling interval number factor. For the value M of the sampling interval number field, for example: the sampling interval number field has 2 bits, and the sampling interval number field value is 0/1/2/3, which respectively indicates that the value of M is 0/1/2/3. For the sampling interval number factor K, the value of the sampling interval number factor K can be determined by at least one of the following methods: the value of K is configured by the network device through RRC/MAC CE/DCI signaling, the value of K is a default value, the value of K is a default value and is related to the subcarrier spacing, and the value of K is a value determined according to the terminal device capability; optionally, the value of K is 1, indicating that the number of sampling intervals contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is M· TC or M· TS , that is, the sampling interval number is directly determined by the value of the sampling interval number field.
参照图17,图17为根据第七实施例示出的控制方法的第四示例示意图,如图17所示,如果K的取值是16,候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数是M·16TC或M·16TS,当M的取值为2时,表示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数是32TC或32TS。Referring to FIG17 , FIG17 is a schematic diagram of a fourth example of a control method according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG17 , if the value of K is 16, the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is M· 16TC or M·16TS . When the value of M is 2, it indicates that the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is 32TC or 32TS .
可选地,终端设备根据收到的指示信息,对候选小区进行下行同步,即:终端设备根据候选小区的下行同步信息以及参考小区的定时关系(例如:时间单元(帧、子帧、时隙)边界)确定候选小区的定时关系,从而对候选小区进行下行同步。例如:根据以下至少一个域的取值从参考小区的定时关系(例如:时间单元(帧、子帧、时隙)边界)得到候选小区的定时关系:候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域取值、频率内候选小区判定域取值、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域。再例如:如图16所示,提前于参考小区判定域取值为0,频率内候选小区判定域取值为1,符号数域取值为3,表示对于相同编号的帧,候选小区落后于参考小区3个符号。Optionally, the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell according to the received indication information, that is: the terminal device determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell according to the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell and the timing relationship of the reference cell (for example: the boundary of the time unit (frame, subframe, time slot)), thereby performing downlink synchronization on the candidate cell. For example: the timing relationship of the candidate cell is obtained from the timing relationship of the reference cell (for example: the boundary of the time unit (frame, subframe, time slot)) according to the value of at least one of the following fields: candidate cell identification field, value of the decision field ahead of the reference cell, value of the decision field within the frequency candidate cell, subframe number field, time slot number field, symbol number field and sampling interval number field. For another example: as shown in Figure 16, the value of the decision field ahead of the reference cell is 0, the value of the decision field within the frequency candidate cell is 1, and the value of the symbol number field is 3, indicating that for frames with the same number, the candidate cell lags behind the reference cell by 3 symbols.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过根据参考小区的时间单元边界以及候选小区的定时关系获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,使终端设备在获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息时,使用尽量少的比特信息,减少终端设备的开销;和/或,使用有限的下行同步信息对候选小区进行更精准的下行同步。This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by obtaining or getting the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to the time unit boundary of the reference cell and the timing relationship of the candidate cell, so that the terminal device uses as little bit information as possible when obtaining or getting the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, thereby reducing the overhead of the terminal device; and/or using limited downlink synchronization information to perform more accurate downlink synchronization of the candidate cell.
第七实施例Seventh embodiment
在上述任一实施例的基础上,本实施例进一步公开了前述实施例中的控制方法。Based on any of the above embodiments, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
可选地,终端设备还可以根据候选小区的同步广播块索引值确定候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device may also determine the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息包括以下至少一个域:候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域、频率内候选小区判定域、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域。Optionally, the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell including at least one of the following fields: candidate cell identification field, advance reference cell determination field, intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, subframe number field, time slot number field, symbol number field and sampling interval number field.
可选地,候选小区标识域包括以下至少一项:特殊小区的服务小区索引值(例如:servCellIndex)、辅小区的辅小区索引值(例如:sCellIndex)、物理小区标识(例如:PCI)、层1/层2候选索引值以及附加的物理小区标识。Optionally, the candidate cell identification field includes at least one of the following: a serving cell index value of a special cell (e.g., servCellIndex), a secondary cell index value of a secondary cell (e.g., sCellIndex), a physical cell identifier (e.g., PCI), a layer 1/layer 2 candidate index value, and an additional physical cell identifier.
可选地,对于频率内候选小区判定域,频率内候选小区判定域为1比特,如果频率内候选小区判定域取值为1或者使能,表示候选小区是频率内的候选小区,候选小区与参考小区在相同的频率载波上;和/或,如果频率内候选小区判定域取值为0或者不使能,表示候选小区是频率间的候选小区,候选小区与参考小区不在相同的频率载波上。Optionally, for the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain, the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain is 1 bit. If the value of the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain is 1 or enabled, it indicates that the candidate cell is an intra-frequency candidate cell, and the candidate cell and the reference cell are on the same frequency carrier; and/or, if the value of the intra-frequency candidate cell determination domain is 0 or not enabled, it indicates that the candidate cell is an inter-frequency candidate cell, and the candidate cell and the reference cell are not on the same frequency carrier.
可选地,候选小区的定时关系(例如:帧、子帧、时隙)由参考小区的定时关系确定,可选地,候选小区的时间单元(例如:帧、子帧、时隙)边界与参考小区对应的时间单元边界对齐,即:候选小区和参考小区的相同编号的时间单元的边界对齐。Optionally, the timing relationship (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) of the candidate cell is determined by the timing relationship of the reference cell. Optionally, the boundary of the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) of the candidate cell is aligned with the boundary of the time unit corresponding to the reference cell, that is, the boundaries of the time units with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell are aligned.
可选地,终端设备根据参考小区的定时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值,终端设备检测/接收同步广播块,根据检测/接收到的同步广播块以及对应的同步广播块索引值确定候选小区的定时关系,即:确定候选小区的时间单元(例如:帧、子帧、时隙)边界,终端设备维护候选小区的下行定时关系,即:维护候选小区的时间单元(例如:帧、子帧、时隙)边界。可选地,在RRC增加从服务小区获得同步广播块索引值域,或者,使用NR测量对象信息元素(例如:MeasObjectNR)中从服务小区获得SSB索引值域(例如:deriveSSB-IndexFromCell),根据以上至少一个域用于指示终端设备是否根据参考小区的定时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值,可选地,如果上述域是使能的,表示终端设备根据参考小区的定时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值。Optionally, the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell, the terminal device detects/receives the synchronization broadcast block, determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell according to the detected/received synchronization broadcast block and the corresponding synchronization broadcast block index value, that is, determines the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell, and the terminal device maintains the downlink timing relationship of the candidate cell, that is, maintains the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell. Optionally, a domain for obtaining the synchronization broadcast block index value from the serving cell is added to the RRC, or the SSB index value domain (e.g., deriveSSB-IndexFromCell) is used to obtain the SSB index value from the serving cell in the NR measurement object information element (e.g., MeasObjectNR). At least one of the above domains is used to indicate whether the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell. Optionally, if the above domain is enabled, it indicates that the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell.
可选地,终端设备根据参考小区的定时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值,终端设备检测/接收同步广播块,根据检测/接收到的同步广播块以及对应的同步广播块索引值确定候选小区的定时关系,即:确定候选小区的时间单元(例如:帧、子帧、时隙)边界。终端设备确定候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时间单元数由至少一个时间单元数域的取值决定,例如:候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时隙数由时隙数域的取值决定,再例如:候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定,再例如:候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数是M·K·TC或M·K·TS,其中,M是采样间隔数域的取值,K为采样间隔数因子,对于采样间隔数因子K,采样间隔数因子K的取值可以由以下至少一种方式确定:K的取值由网络设备通过RRC/MAC CE/DCI信令配置、K的取值是一个默认值、K的取值是一个默认值并且与子载波间隔相关、K的取值是根据终端设备能力确定的值;可选地,K的取值为1,表示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数是M·TC或M·TS,即:直接通过采样间隔数域的取值决定采样间隔数。可选地,在RRC增加从服务小区获得同步广播块索引值域,或者,使用NR测量对象信息元素(例如:MeasObjectNR)中从服务小区获得SSB索引值域(例如:deriveSSB-IndexFromCell),根据以上至少一个域用于指示终端设备是否根据参考小区的定时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值,可选地,如果上述域是使能的,表示终端设备根据参考小区的定时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值。Optionally, the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell based on the timing relationship of the reference cell. The terminal device detects/receives the synchronization broadcast block, and determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell based on the detected/received synchronization broadcast block and the corresponding synchronization broadcast block index value, that is, determines the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell. The number of time units included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell determined by the terminal device is determined by the value of at least one time unit number field, for example: the number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field, for another example: the number of symbols included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field, for another example: the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is M·K· TC or M·K· TS , where M is the value of the sampling interval number field, K is the sampling interval number factor, and for the sampling interval number factor K, the value of the sampling interval number factor K can be determined by at least one of the following methods: the value of K is determined by the network device through RRC/MAC CE/DCI signaling configuration, the value of K is a default value, the value of K is a default value and is related to the subcarrier spacing, and the value of K is a value determined according to the terminal device capability; optionally, the value of K is 1, indicating that the number of sampling intervals contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is M· TC or M· TS , that is, the number of sampling intervals is directly determined by the value of the sampling interval number field. Optionally, the RRC adds a synchronized broadcast block index value field obtained from the serving cell, or the SSB index value field (for example: deriveSSB-IndexFromCell) is used to obtain the SSB index value from the serving cell in the NR measurement object information element (for example: MeasObjectNR). At least one of the above fields is used to indicate whether the terminal device determines the synchronized broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell. Optionally, if the above field is enabled, it indicates that the terminal device determines the synchronized broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell.
可选地,终端设备候选小区和参考小区的相同编号的时间单元的边界对齐,终端设备根据参考小区的定
时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值,终端设备检测/接收同步广播块,根据检测/接收到的同步广播块以及对应的同步广播块索引值确定候选小区的定时关系,即:确定候选小区的时间单元(例如:帧、子帧、时隙)边界,终端设备维护候选小区的下行定时关系,即:维护候选小区的时间单元(例如:帧、子帧、时隙)边界。可选地,在RRC新增从服务小区获得同步广播块索引值域,或者,使用NR测量对象信息元素(例如:MeasObjectNR)中从服务小区获得SSB索引值域(例如:deriveSSB-IndexFromCell),根据以上至少一个域用于指示终端设备是否根据参考小区的定时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值,可选地,如果上述域是使能的,表示终端设备根据参考小区的定时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值。Optionally, the boundaries of the time units of the same number of the terminal device candidate cell and the reference cell are aligned, and the terminal device determines the time unit according to the reference cell. The terminal device detects/receives the synchronization broadcast block, and determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell according to the detected/received synchronization broadcast block and the corresponding synchronization broadcast block index value, that is, determines the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell. The terminal device maintains the downlink timing relationship of the candidate cell, that is, maintains the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell. Optionally, a new domain for obtaining the synchronization broadcast block index value from the serving cell is added in the RRC, or the SSB index value domain (e.g., deriveSSB-IndexFromCell) is used to obtain the SSB index value from the serving cell in the NR measurement object information element (e.g., MeasObjectNR). At least one of the above domains is used to indicate whether the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell. Optionally, if the above domain is enabled, it indicates that the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell.
可选地,终端设备候选小区和参考小区的相同编号的时间单元的边界对齐,终端设备根据参考小区的定时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值,终端设备检测/接收同步广播块,根据检测/接收到的同步广播块以及对应的同步广播块索引值确定候选小区的定时关系,即:确定候选小区的时间单元(例如:帧、子帧、时隙)边界。终端设备确定候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时间单元数由至少一个时间单元数域的取值决定,例如:候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时隙数由时隙数域的取值决定,再例如:候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定,再例如:候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数是M·K·TC或M·K·TS,其中,M是采样间隔数域的取值,K为采样间隔数因子,对于采样间隔数因子K,采样间隔数因子K的取值可以由以下至少一种方式确定:K的取值由网络设备通过RRC/MAC CE/DCI信令配置、K的取值是一个默认值、K的取值是一个默认值并且与子载波间隔相关、K的取值是根据UE能力确定的值;可选地,K的取值为1,表示候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数是M·TC或M·TS,即:直接通过采样间隔数域的取值决定采样间隔数。可选地,在RRC新增从服务小区获得同步广播块索引值域,或者,使用NR测量对象信息元素(例如:MeasObjectNR)中从服务小区获得SSB索引值域(例如:deriveSSB-IndexFromCell),根据以上至少一个域用于指示终端设备是否根据参考小区的定时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值,可选地,如果上述域是使能的,表示终端设备根据参考小区的定时关系确定候选小区的同步广播块索引值。Optionally, the boundaries of the time units with the same number of the terminal device candidate cell and the reference cell are aligned, the terminal device determines the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell based on the timing relationship of the reference cell, the terminal device detects/receives the synchronization broadcast block, and determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell based on the detected/received synchronization broadcast block and the corresponding synchronization broadcast block index value, that is, determining the boundaries of the time units (e.g., frames, subframes, time slots) of the candidate cell. The number of time units included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell determined by the terminal device is determined by the value of at least one time unit number field, for example: the number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field, for another example: the number of symbols included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field, for another example: the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is M·K· TC or M·K· TS , where M is the value of the sampling interval number field, K is the sampling interval number factor, and for the sampling interval number factor K, the value of the sampling interval number factor K can be determined by at least one of the following methods: the value of K is determined by the network device through RRC/MAC CE/DCI signaling configuration, the value of K is a default value, the value of K is a default value and is related to the subcarrier spacing, and the value of K is a value determined according to the UE capability; optionally, the value of K is 1, indicating that the number of sampling intervals contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is M· TC or M· TS , that is: the number of sampling intervals is directly determined by the value of the sampling interval number field. Optionally, a new synchronized broadcast block index value field is added to the RRC to obtain the synchronized broadcast block index value from the serving cell, or the SSB index value field is obtained from the serving cell in the NR measurement object information element (for example: MeasObjectNR) (for example: deriveSSB-IndexFromCell), and at least one of the above fields is used to indicate whether the terminal device determines the synchronized broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell. Optionally, if the above field is enabled, it indicates that the terminal device determines the synchronized broadcast block index value of the candidate cell according to the timing relationship of the reference cell.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过根据候选小区的同步广播块索引值确定候选小区的下行同步信息,使终端设备在获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息时,使用尽量少的比特信息,减少终端设备的开销;和/或,使用有限的下行同步信息对候选小区进行更精准的下行同步。This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by determining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell, so that the terminal device uses as little bit information as possible when acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, thereby reducing the overhead of the terminal device; and/or using limited downlink synchronization information to perform more accurate downlink synchronization of the candidate cell.
第八实施例Eighth embodiment
在上述任一实施例的基础上,本实施例进一步公开了前述实施例中的控制方法。Based on any of the above embodiments, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
可选地,由于终端设备保存的候选小区的下行同步信息具有时效性,即经过预设时间后,使用下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步时,候选小区的下行同步可能不够精准,则终端设备可以适时保存或更新或清空候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, since the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell saved by the terminal device is time-sensitive, that is, after a preset time, when the downlink synchronization information is used to downlink synchronize the candidate cell, the downlink synchronization of the candidate cell may not be accurate enough, the terminal device can save, update or clear the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell in a timely manner.
可选地,保存或更新或清空候选小区的下行同步信息,包括以下至少一项:Optionally, saving, updating, or clearing downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes at least one of the following:
响应于检测到或接收到新的同步广播块,保存或更新候选小区的下行同步信息,和/或,重启候选小区对应的下行同步信息时效性定时器;In response to detecting or receiving a new synchronization broadcast block, saving or updating downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, and/or restarting a downlink synchronization information validity timer corresponding to the candidate cell;
响应于候选小区对应的下行同步信息时效性定时器超时,清空候选小区的下行同步信息;In response to the downlink synchronization information validity timer corresponding to the candidate cell expiring, clearing the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
响应于发送或接收到指示信息,清空所述指示信息对应的候选小区以外的候选小区的下行同步信息;In response to sending or receiving the indication information, clearing downlink synchronization information of candidate cells other than the candidate cell corresponding to the indication information;
响应于完成下行同步和/或收到确认指示,清空对应的候选小区的下行同步信息。In response to completing downlink synchronization and/or receiving a confirmation indication, clearing downlink synchronization information of the corresponding candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备检测和/或接收候选小区的同步广播块,根据同步广播块获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,如果终端设备检测和/或接收到新的同步广播块,清空该候选小区的旧的下行同步信息,根据最新的同步广播块获取或得到该候选小区的最新的下行同步信息,终端设备根据最新的下行同步信息对该候选小区进行下行同步。Optionally, the terminal device detects and/or receives the synchronization broadcast block of the candidate cell, and obtains or gets the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the synchronization broadcast block. If the terminal device detects and/or receives a new synchronization broadcast block, it clears the old downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, obtains or gets the latest downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the latest synchronization broadcast block, and the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the latest downlink synchronization information.
可选地,终端设备还可以保存或更新或清空候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device may also save, update or clear the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
可选地,网络设备配置一个下行同步信息时效性定时器,该定时器包括一个下行同步信息有效的持续时间,终端设备每次保存候选小区的下行同步信息时,重启该候选小区对应的定时器,在该下行同步信息有效的持续时间内,终端设备认为保存的下行同步信息是有效的,如果该定时器超时,即:保存的下行同步信息时间超过下行同步信息有效的持续时间,则表示保存的下行同步信息是无效的,终端设备不能根据保存的下行同步信息对该候选小区进行下行同步。可选地,如果该定时器超时,终端设备清空该候选小区的下行同步信息,即:不再保存该候选小区的下行同步信息,终端设备不能再根据这些保存的下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。Optionally, the network device configures a downlink synchronization information validity timer, which includes a duration for which the downlink synchronization information is valid. Each time the terminal device saves the downlink synchronization information of a candidate cell, it restarts the timer corresponding to the candidate cell. During the duration for which the downlink synchronization information is valid, the terminal device considers the saved downlink synchronization information to be valid. If the timer times out, that is, the time for saving the downlink synchronization information exceeds the duration for which the downlink synchronization information is valid, it indicates that the saved downlink synchronization information is invalid, and the terminal device cannot perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information. Optionally, if the timer times out, the terminal device clears the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, that is, the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell is no longer saved, and the terminal device can no longer perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information.
可选地,终端设备从网络设备接收到指示信息或向网络设备发送指示信息时,除了指示信息对应的候选小区,也称目标小区,终端设备清空其他候选小区的下行同步信息,即:不再保存其他候选小区的下行同步信息,终端设备不能再根据这些保存的下行同步信息对其他候选小区进行下行同步,其中,指示信息包括以下至少一个:物理下行控制信道命令(例如:PDCCH order)、小区切换命令(例如:cell switch command)、终端设备向目标小区发送的小区切换确认消息、网络设备对终端设备向目标小区发送的小区切换确认消息的确认指示。Optionally, when the terminal device receives indication information from the network device or sends indication information to the network device, except for the candidate cell corresponding to the indication information, also called the target cell, the terminal device clears the downlink synchronization information of other candidate cells, that is, the downlink synchronization information of other candidate cells is no longer saved, and the terminal device can no longer perform downlink synchronization on other candidate cells based on the saved downlink synchronization information, wherein the indication information includes at least one of the following: a physical downlink control channel command (e.g., PDCCH order), a cell switching command (e.g., cell switch command), a cell switching confirmation message sent by the terminal device to the target cell, and a confirmation indication of the network device to the cell switching confirmation message sent by the terminal device to the target cell.
可选地,终端设备在预设条件下,终端设备清空候选小区的下行同步信息,即:不再保存候选小区的下行同步信息,终端设备不能再根据这些保存的下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步,可选地,预设条件包括以下至少一个:终端设备根据保存的下行同步信息对目标小区完成下行同步、终端设备收到网络设备对其向目标小区发送的小区切换确认消息的确认指示。Optionally, under preset conditions, the terminal device clears the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, that is, the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell is no longer saved, and the terminal device can no longer perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information. Optionally, the preset conditions include at least one of the following: the terminal device completes downlink synchronization of the target cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information, and the terminal device receives a confirmation indication from the network device on the cell switching confirmation message sent to the target cell.
第九实施例
Ninth embodiment
参照图18,图18为根据第九实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图,所述控制方法可应用于网络设备(如:基站),包括步骤:Referring to FIG. 18 , FIG. 18 is a flow chart of a control method according to a ninth embodiment. The control method can be applied to a network device (eg, a base station), and includes the following steps:
S2:发送第一下行信息,以使终端设备基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。S2: Send the first downlink information so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information.
可选地,网络设备将第一下行信息发送至终端设备,使终端设备基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。Optionally, the network device sends the first downlink information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
可选地,所述方法还包括:Optionally, the method further comprises:
S1:发送第二下行信息,以使终端设备基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息。S1: Send the second downlink information so that the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
可选地,网络设备将第二下行信息发送至终端设备,使终端设备基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息,进而结合第一下行信息对候选小区进行下行同步。Optionally, the network device sends the second downlink information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information, and then performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell in combination with the first downlink information.
可选地,所述方法包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the method comprises at least one of the following:
所述第一下行信息包括物理下行控制信道命令和/或小区切换命令;The first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command;
所述下行同步信息包括候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域、频率内候选小区判定域、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域中的至少一项;The downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field;
第二下行信息包括候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元、下行控制信息及下行信号中的至少一项。The second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and a downlink signal.
可选地,第一下行信息包括PDCCH order和/或小区切换命令。Optionally, the first downlink information includes PDCCH order and/or cell switching command.
可选地,下行同步信息包括候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域、频率内候选小区判定域、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域中的至少一项。Optionally, the downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance-to-reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field.
可选地,第二下行信息包括MAC CE、DCI及下行信号中的至少一项。Optionally, the second downlink information includes at least one of MAC CE, DCI and a downlink signal.
可选地,所述终端设备基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息的步骤包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the step of the terminal device acquiring or obtaining downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information includes at least one of the following:
所述终端设备根据候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元和/或下行控制信息选取或确定候选小区,获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息;The terminal device selects or determines a candidate cell according to the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit and/or downlink control information, and acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
所述终端设备根据下行信号确定候选小区的测量结果,获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息。The terminal device determines the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, and obtains or acquires the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions.
可选地,网络设备可以根据终端设备上报的测量结果选取或确定候选小区,并通过MAC CE向终端设备指示需要进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区,终端设备对MAC CE中指示的候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the network device may select or determine a candidate cell based on the measurement results reported by the terminal device, and indicate to the terminal device through MAC CE the candidate cells that require downlink synchronization and acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information. The terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cells indicated in MAC CE and acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cells.
可选地,网络设备可以根据终端设备上报的测量结果选取或确定候选小区,测量结果由终端设备测量候选小区的下行信号得到。Optionally, the network device may select or determine a candidate cell according to a measurement result reported by the terminal device, where the measurement result is obtained by the terminal device measuring a downlink signal of the candidate cell.
可选地,网络设备通过在DCI中增加候选小区标识向终端设备指示需要进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区,终端设备对DCI中指示的候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the network device indicates to the terminal device the candidate cell that needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get downlink synchronization information by adding a candidate cell identifier in the DCI. The terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the DCI and obtains or gets the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息,可选地,预设条件包括候选小区的测量结果的偏移值大于或等于源小区的测量结果,和/或,候选小区的测量结果大于或等于预设门限值。Optionally, the terminal device acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information corresponding to a candidate cell whose measurement results meet preset conditions. Optionally, the preset conditions include that the offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the measurement result of the source cell, and/or that the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value.
可选地,终端设备基于预设规则,根据参考小区的时间单元获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,可选地,参考小区包括源小区、与候选小区在相同的频率载波上且已被检测出的小区、候选小区对应小区组的特殊小区以及网络设备配置的参考小区中的至少一项。Optionally, the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on preset rules and according to the time unit of the reference cell. Optionally, the reference cell includes at least one of the source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of the cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by the network device.
可选地,预设规则包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the preset rule includes at least one of the following:
候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时隙数由时隙数域的取值决定;The number of time slots included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field;
候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定;The number of symbols contained in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field;
候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数由采样间隔数域的取值和/或采样间隔数因子决定。The number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between the frames with the same number of the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the sampling interval number field and/or the sampling interval number factor.
可选地,终端设备可以根据参考小区的时间单元边界以及候选小区的定时关系获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,也可以根据候选小区的同步广播块索引值确定候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device may acquire or obtain the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the time unit boundary of the reference cell and the timing relationship of the candidate cell, or may determine the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备还可以保存或更新或清空候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device may also save, update or clear the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备保存的下行同步信息通常具有时效性,如果终端设备检测到或接收到候选小区的同步广播块,可以根据同步广播块保存候选小区的下行同步信息;如果终端设备检测到或接收到新的同步广播块,可以清空该候选小区的旧的下行同步信息,根据最新的同步广播块保存该候选小区的最新的下行同步信息,终端设备根据最新的下行同步信息对该候选小区进行下行同步。Optionally, the downlink synchronization information saved by the terminal device is usually time-sensitive. If the terminal device detects or receives a synchronization broadcast block of a candidate cell, the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be saved based on the synchronization broadcast block. If the terminal device detects or receives a new synchronization broadcast block, the old downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be cleared, and the latest downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be saved based on the latest synchronization broadcast block. The terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the latest downlink synchronization information.
可选地,如果终端设备保存的下行同步信息时间超过下行同步信息有效的持续时间,则表示保存的下行同步信息是无效的,终端设备不能根据保存的下行同步信息对该候选小区进行下行同步,则可以清空该候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, if the downlink synchronization information saved by the terminal device exceeds the validity duration of the downlink synchronization information, it means that the saved downlink synchronization information is invalid, and the terminal device cannot perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information. The downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be cleared.
可选地,如果终端设备从网络设备接收到指示信息或向网络设备发送指示信息时,除了指示信息对应的候选小区,终端设备则可以清空其他候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, if the terminal device receives indication information from the network device or sends indication information to the network device, the terminal device may clear the downlink synchronization information of other candidate cells except the candidate cell corresponding to the indication information.
可选地,如果终端设备根据保存的下行同步信息对目标小区完成下行同步,和/或,终端设备收到网络设备对其向目标小区发送的小区切换确认消息的确认指示,终端设备则可以清空对应的候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, if the terminal device completes downlink synchronization of the target cell according to the saved downlink synchronization information, and/or the terminal device receives a confirmation indication from the network device on the cell switching confirmation message sent to the target cell, the terminal device can clear the downlink synchronization information of the corresponding candidate cell.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过发送第一下行信息,以使终端设备基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步,使终端设备在接收到小区切换命令之前即可确定需要获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区,并基于第一下行信息进行下行同步操作,减少接收到小区切换命令之后的等待时间,从而降
低小区切换过程中的时延。This embodiment uses the above scheme, specifically by sending the first downlink information, so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information, so that the terminal device can determine the candidate cell that needs to obtain or get the downlink synchronization information before receiving the cell switching command, and perform the downlink synchronization operation based on the first downlink information, thereby reducing the waiting time after receiving the cell switching command, thereby reducing Low latency during cell switching.
第十实施例Tenth embodiment
参照图19,图19为根据第十实施例示出的第一交互时序示意图,在上述任一实施例的基础上,本实施例进一步公开了前述实施例中的控制方法。Refer to Figure 19, which is a schematic diagram of the first interaction sequence according to the tenth embodiment. Based on any of the above embodiments, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
在本申请实施例中,网络设备(如:基站)发送第一下行信息和/或第二下行信息至终端设备(如:手机)。In an embodiment of the present application, a network device (eg, a base station) sends first downlink information and/or second downlink information to a terminal device (eg, a mobile phone).
可选地,网络设备发送第二下行信息至终端设备,以使终端设备基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息。Optionally, the network device sends the second downlink information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
可选地,网络设备发送第一下行信息至终端设备,以使终端设备基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。Optionally, the network device sends first downlink information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information.
可选地,终端设备从网络设备接收到指示信息时,根据指示信息选择或确定候选小区,再根据候选小区的下行同步信息以及参考小区的定时关系(例如:帧、子帧、时隙)确定候选小区的定时关系,即:确定候选小区的时间单元(例如:帧、子帧、时隙)边界,其中,指示信息包括以下至少一个:物理下行控制信道命令(例如:PDCCH order)、小区切换命令(例如:cell switch command)。终端设备在收到指示信息时,对候选小区(又称为目标小区)完成下行同步。如图19所示,终端设备接收到物理下行控制信道命令时,根据候选小区的下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。Optionally, when the terminal device receives the indication information from the network device, it selects or determines the candidate cell according to the indication information, and then determines the timing relationship of the candidate cell according to the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell and the timing relationship of the reference cell (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot), that is, determines the time unit (e.g., frame, subframe, time slot) boundary of the candidate cell, wherein the indication information includes at least one of the following: physical downlink control channel command (e.g., PDCCH order), cell switching command (e.g., cell switch command). When the terminal device receives the indication information, it completes downlink synchronization of the candidate cell (also called the target cell). As shown in Figure 19, when the terminal device receives the physical downlink control channel command, it performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell according to the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
参照图20,图20为根据第十实施例示出的第二交互时序示意图,如图20所示,终端设备接收到小区切换命令时,根据候选小区的下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。Referring to FIG. 20 , FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of a second interaction sequence according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 20 , when the terminal device receives a cell switching command, it performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell according to the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备向网络设备上报终端设备保存候选小区下行同步信息的能力值,即终端设备保存候选小区下行同步信息的最大候选小区个数,并测量候选小区的下行信号,进而向网络设备上报测量结果。Optionally, the terminal device reports to the network device the capability value of storing downlink synchronization information of candidate cells, i.e., the maximum number of candidate cells for which the terminal device stores downlink synchronization information of candidate cells, and measures downlink signals of the candidate cells, and then reports the measurement results to the network device.
可选地,网络设备选取或确定候选小区,并通过MAC CE向终端设备指示需要进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区。Optionally, the network device selects or determines a candidate cell, and indicates to the terminal device through MAC CE the candidate cell that needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or get downlink synchronization information.
可选地,终端设备对MAC CE中指示的候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the MAC CE and obtains or acquires downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备测量候选小区的下行信号并将测量结果上报至网络设备。Optionally, the terminal device measures the downlink signal of the candidate cell and reports the measurement result to the network device.
可选地,网络设备选取或确定候选小区,并通过在DCI中增加候选小区标识向终端设备指示需要进行下行同步并获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区。Optionally, the network device selects or determines a candidate cell, and indicates to the terminal device the candidate cell that needs to perform downlink synchronization and obtain or acquire downlink synchronization information by adding a candidate cell identifier in the DCI.
可选地,终端设备对DCI中指示的候选小区进行下行同步并获取或得到候选小区对应的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell indicated in the DCI and acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息,可选地,预设条件包括候选小区的测量结果的偏移值大于或等于源小区的测量结果,和/或,候选小区的测量结果大于或等于预设门限值。Optionally, the terminal device acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information corresponding to a candidate cell whose measurement results meet preset conditions. Optionally, the preset conditions include that the offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the measurement result of the source cell, and/or that the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value.
可选地,终端设备基于预设规则,根据参考小区的时间单元获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,可选地,参考小区包括源小区、与候选小区在相同的频率载波上且已被检测出的小区、候选小区对应小区组的特殊小区以及网络设备配置的参考小区中的至少一项。Optionally, the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on preset rules and according to the time unit of the reference cell. Optionally, the reference cell includes at least one of the source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of the cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by the network device.
可选地,终端设备可以根据参考小区的时间单元边界以及候选小区的定时关系获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,也可以根据候选小区的同步广播块索引值确定候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device may acquire or obtain the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the time unit boundary of the reference cell and the timing relationship of the candidate cell, or may determine the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell based on the synchronization broadcast block index value of the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备还可以保存或更新或清空候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, the terminal device may also save, update or clear the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell.
可选地,终端设备保存的下行同步信息通常具有时效性,如果终端设备检测到或接收到候选小区的同步广播块,可以根据同步广播块保存候选小区的下行同步信息;如果终端设备检测到或接收到新的同步广播块,可以清空该候选小区的旧的下行同步信息,根据最新的同步广播块保存该候选小区的最新的下行同步信息,终端设备根据最新的下行同步信息对该候选小区进行下行同步。Optionally, the downlink synchronization information saved by the terminal device is usually time-sensitive. If the terminal device detects or receives a synchronization broadcast block of a candidate cell, the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be saved based on the synchronization broadcast block. If the terminal device detects or receives a new synchronization broadcast block, the old downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be cleared, and the latest downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be saved based on the latest synchronization broadcast block. The terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the latest downlink synchronization information.
可选地,如果终端设备保存的下行同步信息时间超过下行同步信息有效的持续时间,则表示保存的下行同步信息是无效的,终端设备不能根据保存的下行同步信息对该候选小区进行下行同步,则可以清空该候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, if the downlink synchronization information saved by the terminal device exceeds the validity duration of the downlink synchronization information, it means that the saved downlink synchronization information is invalid, and the terminal device cannot perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the saved downlink synchronization information. The downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell can be cleared.
可选地,如果终端设备从网络设备接收到指示信息或向网络设备发送指示信息时,除了指示信息对应的候选小区,终端设备则可以清空其他候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, if the terminal device receives indication information from the network device or sends indication information to the network device, the terminal device may clear the downlink synchronization information of other candidate cells except the candidate cell corresponding to the indication information.
可选地,如果终端设备根据下行同步信息对目标小区完成下行同步,和/或,终端设备收到网络设备对其向目标小区发送的小区切换确认消息的确认指示,终端设备则可以清空对应的候选小区的下行同步信息。Optionally, if the terminal device completes downlink synchronization of the target cell according to the downlink synchronization information, and/or the terminal device receives a confirmation indication from the network device regarding the cell switching confirmation message sent to the target cell, the terminal device can clear the downlink synchronization information of the corresponding candidate cell.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过网络设备发送第一下行信息和/或第二下行信息至终端设备,以使终端设备基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步,和/或,使终端设备基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息,以使终端设备在接收到小区切换命令之前即可确定需要获取或得到下行同步信息的候选小区,并基于第一下行信息进行下行同步操作,减少接收到小区切换命令之后的等待时间,从而降低小区切换过程中的时延。This embodiment uses the above scheme, specifically, by sending the first downlink information and/or the second downlink information to the terminal device through the network device, so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information, and/or, the terminal device obtains or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information, so that the terminal device can determine the candidate cell that needs to obtain or obtain the downlink synchronization information before receiving the cell switching command, and perform the downlink synchronization operation based on the first downlink information, thereby reducing the waiting time after receiving the cell switching command, thereby reducing the delay in the cell switching process.
请参见图21,图21为本申请实施例提供的控制装置的结构示意图一,该装置可搭载在或就是上述方法实施例中的终端设备。该装置可以用于执行上述实施例所描述的方法实施例中的部分或全部功能。如图21所示,该控制装置110包括:Please refer to Figure 21, which is a schematic diagram of the structure of the control device provided in the embodiment of the present application. The device can be mounted on or is the terminal device in the above method embodiment. The device can be used to perform some or all of the functions in the method embodiment described in the above embodiment. As shown in Figure 21, the control device 110 includes:
控制模块111,用于基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。The control module 111 is configured to perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
可选地,所述装置还包括:Optionally, the device further comprises:
基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息。The downlink synchronization information is acquired or obtained based on the second downlink information.
可选地,基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息包括以下至少一项:
Optionally, acquiring or obtaining downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information includes at least one of the following:
根据候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元和/或下行控制信息选取或确定候选小区,获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息;Select or determine a candidate cell according to the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit and/or downlink control information, and acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
根据下行信号确定候选小区的测量结果,获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息。The measurement result of the candidate cell is determined according to the downlink signal, and the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset condition is acquired or obtained.
可选地,所述装置包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the device comprises at least one of the following:
所述满足预设条件包括:候选小区的测量结果的偏移值大于或等于源小区的测量结果,和/或,候选小区的测量结果大于或等于预设门限值;The satisfying of the preset condition includes: an offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the measurement result of the source cell, and/or the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value;
所述获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,包括:基于预设规则,根据参考小区的时间单元获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息。The acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes: acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to a time unit of a reference cell based on a preset rule.
可选地,所述装置还包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the device further comprises at least one of the following:
所述参考小区包括以下至少一项:源小区、与候选小区在相同的频率载波上且已被检测出的小区、候选小区对应小区组的特殊小区以及网络设备配置的参考小区;The reference cell includes at least one of the following: a source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of a cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by a network device;
所述预设规则包括以下至少一项:候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时隙数由时隙数域的取值决定;候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定;候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数由采样间隔数域的取值和/或采样间隔数因子决定。The preset rules include at least one of the following: the number of time slots included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field; the number of symbols included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field; the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the sampling interval number field and/or the sampling interval number factor.
可选地,所述装置还包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the device further comprises at least one of the following:
第一下行信息包括物理下行控制信道命令和/或小区切换命令;The first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command;
所述下行同步信息包括候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域、频率内候选小区判定域、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域中的至少一项;The downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field;
保存或更新或清空下行同步信息;Save, update or clear downlink synchronization information;
第二下行信息包括候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元、下行控制信息及下行信号中的至少一项。The second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and a downlink signal.
可选地,保存或更新或清空候选小区的下行同步信息,包括以下至少一项:Optionally, saving, updating, or clearing downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes at least one of the following:
响应于检测到或接收到新的同步广播块,保存或更新候选小区的下行同步信息,和/或,重启候选小区对应的下行同步信息时效性定时器;In response to detecting or receiving a new synchronization broadcast block, saving or updating downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, and/or restarting a downlink synchronization information validity timer corresponding to the candidate cell;
响应于候选小区对应的下行同步信息时效性定时器超时,清空候选小区的下行同步信息;In response to the downlink synchronization information validity timer corresponding to the candidate cell expiring, clearing the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
响应于发送或接收到指示信息,清空所述指示信息对应的候选小区以外的候选小区的下行同步信息;In response to sending or receiving the indication information, clearing downlink synchronization information of candidate cells other than the candidate cell corresponding to the indication information;
响应于完成下行同步和/或收到确认指示,清空对应的候选小区的下行同步信息。In response to completing downlink synchronization and/or receiving a confirmation indication, clearing downlink synchronization information of the corresponding candidate cell.
本申请实施例提供的控制装置可以执行上述方法实施例所示的技术方案,其实现原理以及有益效果类似,此处不再进行赘述。The control device provided in the embodiment of the present application can execute the technical solution shown in the above method embodiment, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
请参见图22,图22为本申请实施例提供的控制装置的结构示意图二,该装置可搭载在或就是上述方法实施例中的网络设备。该装置可以用于执行上述实施例所描述的方法实施例中的部分或全部功能。如图22所示,该控制装置120包括:Please refer to Figure 22, which is a second schematic diagram of the structure of the control device provided in the embodiment of the present application. The device can be mounted on or is the network device in the above method embodiment. The device can be used to perform some or all of the functions in the method embodiment described in the above embodiment. As shown in Figure 22, the control device 120 includes:
发送模块121,用于发送第一下行信息,以使终端设备基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。The sending module 121 is used to send the first downlink information so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information.
可选地,所述装置还包括:Optionally, the device further comprises:
发送第二下行信息,以使终端设备基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息。The second downlink information is sent so that the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
可选地,所述装置包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the device comprises at least one of the following:
所述第一下行信息包括物理下行控制信道命令和/或小区切换命令;The first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command;
所述下行同步信息包括候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域、频率内候选小区判定域、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域中的至少一项;The downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field;
第二下行信息包括候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元、下行控制信息及下行信号中的至少一项。The second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and a downlink signal.
可选地,所述终端设备基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息的步骤包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the step of the terminal device acquiring or obtaining downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information includes at least one of the following:
所述终端设备根据候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元和/或下行控制信息选取或确定候选小区,获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息;The terminal device selects or determines a candidate cell according to the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit and/or downlink control information, and acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;
所述终端设备根据下行信号确定候选小区的测量结果,获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息。The terminal device determines the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, and obtains or acquires the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions.
本申请实施例提供的控制装置可以执行上述方法实施例所示的技术方案,其实现原理以及有益效果类似,此处不再进行赘述。The control device provided in the embodiment of the present application can execute the technical solution shown in the above method embodiment, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
参阅图23,图23为本申请实施例提供的通信设备的结构示意图。如图23所示,本实施例所述的通信设备140可以是前述方法实施例中提到的终端设备(或者可用于终端设备的部件)或者网络设备(或者可用于网络设备的部件)。通信设备140可用于实现上述方法实施例中描述的对应于终端设备或者网络设备的方法,具体参见上述方法实施例中的说明。Refer to Figure 23, which is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 23, the communication device 140 described in this embodiment can be a terminal device (or a component that can be used for a terminal device) or a network device (or a component that can be used for a network device) mentioned in the aforementioned method embodiment. The communication device 140 can be used to implement the method corresponding to the terminal device or the network device described in the aforementioned method embodiment, and specifically refer to the description in the aforementioned method embodiment.
通信设备140可以包括一个或多个处理器141,该处理器141也可以称为处理单元,可以实现一定的控制或者处理功能。处理器141可以是通用处理器或者专用处理器等。例如可以是基带处理器、或中央处理器。基带处理器可以用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器可以用于对通信设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。The communication device 140 may include one or more processors 141, which may also be referred to as a processing unit, and may implement certain control or processing functions. The processor 141 may be a general-purpose processor or a dedicated processor, etc. For example, it may be a baseband processor or a central processing unit. The baseband processor may be used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and the central processing unit may be used to control the communication device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
可选地,处理器141也可以存有指令143或者数据(例如中间数据)。可选地,指令143可以被处理器141运行,使得通信设备140执行上述方法实施例中描述的对应于终端设备或者网络设备的方法。Optionally, the processor 141 may also store instructions 143 or data (eg, intermediate data). Optionally, the instructions 143 may be executed by the processor 141, so that the communication device 140 executes the method corresponding to the terminal device or network device described in the above method embodiment.
可选地,通信设备140可以包括电路,该电路可以实现前述方法实施例中发送或接收或者通信的功能。Optionally, the communication device 140 may include a circuit, which can implement the functions of sending or receiving or communicating in the aforementioned method embodiments.
可选地,通信设备140中可以包括一个或多个存储器142,其上可以存有指令144,该指令可在处理器141上被运行,使得通信设备140执行上述方法实施例中描述的方法。
Optionally, the communication device 140 may include one or more memories 142, on which instructions 144 may be stored. The instructions may be executed on the processor 141, so that the communication device 140 executes the method described in the above method embodiment.
可选地,存储器142中也可以是存储有数据。处理器141和存储器142可以单独设置,也可以集成在一起。Optionally, data may also be stored in the memory 142. The processor 141 and the memory 142 may be provided separately or integrated together.
可选地,通信设备140还可以包括收发器145和/或天线146。处理器141可以称为处理单元,对通信设备140(终端设备或核心网设备或者无线接入网设备)进行控制。收发器145可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等,用于实现通信设备140的收发功能。Optionally, the communication device 140 may further include a transceiver 145 and/or an antenna 146. The processor 141 may be referred to as a processing unit, and controls the communication device 140 (terminal device or core network device or wireless access network device). The transceiver 145 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and is used to implement the transceiver function of the communication device 140.
可选地,若该通信设备140用于实现对应于上述各实施例中终端设备的操作时,例如,可以由收发器145接收第一下行信息和/或第二下行信息;以及,由处理器141基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。Optionally, if the communication device 140 is used to implement operations corresponding to the terminal device in the above-mentioned embodiments, for example, the transceiver 145 can receive the first downlink information and/or the second downlink information; and the processor 141 can perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
可选地,处理器141和收发器145的具体实现过程可以参见上述各实施例的相关描述,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the specific implementation process of the processor 141 and the transceiver 145 can refer to the relevant description of the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,若该通信设备140用于实现对应于上述各实施例中网络设备的操作时,例如:可以由收发器145,发送第一下行信息和/或第二下行信息,以使终端设备基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。Optionally, if the communication device 140 is used to implement operations corresponding to the network devices in the above-mentioned embodiments, for example: the transceiver 145 can send the first downlink information and/or the second downlink information so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
可选地,处理器141和收发器145的具体实现过程可以参见上述各实施例的相关描述,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the specific implementation process of the processor 141 and the transceiver 145 can refer to the relevant description of the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
本申请中描述的处理器141和收发器145可实现在IC(Integrated Circuit,集成电路)、模拟集成电路、RFIC(Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit,射频集成电路)、混合信号集成电路、ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,专用集成电路)、PCB(Printed Circuit Board,印刷电路板)、电子设备等上。该处理器141和收发器145也可以用各种集成电路工艺技术来制造,例如CMOS(Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor,互补金属氧化物半导体)、NMOS(N Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor,N型金属氧化物半导体)、PMOS(Positive channel Metal Oxide Semiconductor,P型金属氧化物半导体)、BJT(Bipolar Junction Transistor,双极结型晶体管)、双极CMOS(BiCMOS)、硅锗(SiGe)、砷化镓(GaAs)等。The processor 141 and the transceiver 145 described in the present application can be implemented in an IC (Integrated Circuit), an analog integrated circuit, an RFIC (Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit), a mixed signal integrated circuit, an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), a PCB (Printed Circuit Board), an electronic device, etc. The processor 141 and the transceiver 145 can also be manufactured using various integrated circuit process technologies, such as CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor), NMOS (N Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor), PMOS (Positive channel Metal Oxide Semiconductor), BJT (Bipolar Junction Transistor), bipolar CMOS (BiCMOS), silicon germanium (SiGe), gallium arsenide (GaAs), etc.
本申请中,通信设备可以为终端设备(如手机),也可以为网络设备(如基站),具体需要根据上下文来加以确定,另外,终端设备可以以各种形式来实施。例如,本申请中描述的终端设备可以包括诸如手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、便捷式媒体播放器(Portable Media Player,PMP)、导航装置、可穿戴设备、智能手环、计步器等移动终端,以及诸如数字TV、台式计算机等固定终端设备。In this application, the communication device may be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a base station), which needs to be determined according to the context. In addition, the terminal device may be implemented in various forms. For example, the terminal device described in this application may include mobile terminals such as mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, PDAs, portable media players (PMPs), navigation devices, wearable devices, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc., as well as fixed terminal devices such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
虽然在以上的实施例描述中,通信设备以终端设备或者网络设备为例来描述,但本申请中描述的通信设备的范围并不限于上述终端设备或网络设备,而且通信设备的结构可以不受图23的限制。通信设备可以是独立的设备或者可以是较大设备的一部分。Although in the above embodiment description, the communication device is described by taking a terminal device or a network device as an example, the scope of the communication device described in the present application is not limited to the above terminal device or network device, and the structure of the communication device may not be limited by Figure 23. The communication device may be an independent device or may be part of a larger device.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,包括:如上任一方法实施例中的终端设备;以及,如上任一方法实施例中的网络设备。An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, including: a terminal device as in any of the above method embodiments; and a network device as in any of the above method embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信设备,包括存储器、处理器,存储器上存储有控制程序,控制程序被处理器执行时实现上述任一实施例中的控制方法的步骤。本申请中的通信设备,可以是终端设备(如手机),也可以是网络设备(如基站),具体所指,需要根据上下文加以明确。The embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, including a memory and a processor, wherein a control program is stored in the memory, and when the control program is executed by the processor, the steps of the control method in any of the above embodiments are implemented. The communication device in the present application can be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a base station), and the specific reference needs to be clarified according to the context.
本申请实施例还提供一种存储介质,存储介质上存储有控制程序,控制程序被处理器执行时实现上述任一实施例中的控制方法的步骤。An embodiment of the present application further provides a storage medium having a control program stored thereon. When the control program is executed by a processor, the steps of the control method in any of the above embodiments are implemented.
在本申请实施例提供的通信设备和存储介质的实施例中,可以包含任一上述控制方法实施例的全部技术特征,说明书拓展和解释内容与上述方法的各实施例基本相同,在此不再做赘述。In the embodiments of the communication device and the storage medium provided in the embodiments of the present application, all the technical features of any of the above-mentioned control method embodiments may be included, and the expansion and explanation content of the specification are basically the same as those of the embodiments of the above-mentioned methods, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如上各种可能的实施方式中的方法。The embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program code. When the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the methods in the above various possible implementation modes.
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片,包括存储器和处理器,存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有芯片的设备执行如上各种可能的实施方式中的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including a memory and a processor, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that a device equipped with the chip executes the methods in various possible implementation modes as described above.
可以理解,上述场景仅是作为示例,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的应用场景的限定,本申请的技术方案还可应用于其他场景。例如,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着系统架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。It is understood that the above scenarios are only examples and do not constitute a limitation on the application scenarios of the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application. The technical solutions of the present application can also be applied to other scenarios. For example, it is known to those skilled in the art that with the evolution of the system architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
上述本申请实施例序号仅仅为了描述,不代表实施例的优劣。The serial numbers of the above-mentioned embodiments of the present application are for description only and do not represent the advantages or disadvantages of the embodiments.
本申请实施例方法中的步骤可以根据实际需要进行顺序调整、合并和删减。The steps in the method of the embodiment of the present application can be adjusted in order, combined and deleted according to actual needs.
本申请实施例设备中的单元可以根据实际需要进行合并、划分和删减。The units in the device of the embodiment of the present application can be merged, divided and deleted according to actual needs.
在本申请中,对于相同或相似的术语概念、技术方案和/或应用场景描述,一般只在第一次出现时进行详细描述,后面再重复出现时,为了简洁,一般未再重复阐述,在理解本申请技术方案等内容时,对于在后未详细描述的相同或相似的术语概念、技术方案和/或应用场景描述等,可以参考其之前的相关详细描述。In the present application, the same or similar terminology concepts, technical solutions and/or application scenario descriptions are generally described in detail only the first time they appear. When they appear again later, they are generally not repeated for the sake of brevity. When understanding the technical solutions and other contents of the present application, for the same or similar terminology concepts, technical solutions and/or application scenario descriptions that are not described in detail later, reference can be made to the previous related detailed descriptions.
在本申请中,对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重,某个实施例中没有详述或记载的部分,可以参见其它实施例的相关描述。In the present application, the description of each embodiment has its own emphasis. For parts that are not described or recorded in detail in a certain embodiment, reference can be made to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments.
本申请技术方案的各技术特征可以进行任意的组合,为使描述简洁,未对上述实施例中的各个技术特征所有可能的组合都进行描述,然而,只要这些技术特征的组合不存在矛盾,都应当认为是本申请记载的范围。The various technical features of the technical solution of the present application can be arbitrarily combined. In order to make the description concise, not all possible combinations of the various technical features in the above embodiments are described. However, as long as there is no contradiction in the combination of these technical features, they should be considered to be within the scope of the present application.
通过以上的实施方式的描述,本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到上述实施例方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现,当然也可以通过硬件,但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在如上的一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中,包括若干指令用以使得一台终端设备(可以是手机,计算机,服务器,被控终端设备,或者网络设备等)执行本申请每个实施例的方法。Through the description of the above implementation methods, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that the above-mentioned embodiment methods can be implemented by means of software plus a necessary general hardware platform, and of course by hardware, but in many cases the former is a better implementation method. Based on such an understanding, the technical solution of the present application, or the part that contributes to the prior art, can be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium (such as ROM/RAM, disk, CD) as above, including a number of instructions for a terminal device (which can be a mobile phone, computer, server, controlled terminal device, or network device, etc.) to execute the method of each embodiment of the present application.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络,或者其他可编程装置。计算机指令可以存储在存储介质中,或者从一个存储介质向另一个存储介质传输,例如,计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、存储盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD),或者半导体介质(例如固态存储盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. A computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the process or function according to the embodiment of the present application is generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. Computer instructions can be stored in a storage medium or transmitted from one storage medium to another storage medium. For example, computer instructions can be transmitted from one website, computer, server or data center to another website, computer, server or data center by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The storage medium can be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server or data center that includes one or more available media integrated. Available media can be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disk, storage disk, tape), optical media (e.g., DVD), or semiconductor media (e.g., solid-state storage disk Solid State Disk (SSD)), etc.
以上仅为本申请的优选实施例,并非因此限制本申请的专利范围,凡是利用本申请说明书及附图内容所作的等效结构或等效流程变换,或直接或间接运用在其他相关的技术领域,均同理包括在本申请的专利保护范围内。
The above are only preferred embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the patent scope of the present application. Any equivalent structure or equivalent process transformation made using the contents of the present application specification and drawings, or directly or indirectly applied in other related technical fields, are also included in the patent protection scope of the present application.
Claims (13)
- 一种控制方法,其中,包括步骤:A control method, comprising the steps of:S4:基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。S4: Perform downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or the downlink synchronization information.
- 如权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:S3:基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息。S3: Acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
- 如权利要求2所述的方法,其中,步骤S3包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 2, wherein step S3 comprises at least one of the following:根据候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元和/或下行控制信息选取或确定候选小区,获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息;Select or determine a candidate cell according to the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit and/or downlink control information, and acquire or obtain downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;根据下行信号确定候选小区的测量结果,获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息。The measurement result of the candidate cell is determined according to the downlink signal, and the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset condition is acquired or obtained.
- 如权利要求3所述的方法,其中,包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 3, comprising at least one of the following:所述满足预设条件包括:候选小区的测量结果的偏移值大于或等于源小区的测量结果,和/或,候选小区的测量结果大于或等于预设门限值;The satisfying of the preset condition includes: an offset value of the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the measurement result of the source cell, and/or the measurement result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to a preset threshold value;所述获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息,包括:基于预设规则,根据参考小区的时间单元获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息。The acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell includes: acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell according to a time unit of a reference cell based on a preset rule.
- 如权利要求4所述的方法,其中,还包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 4, further comprising at least one of the following:所述参考小区包括以下至少一项:源小区、与候选小区在相同的频率载波上且已被检测出的小区、候选小区对应小区组的特殊小区以及网络设备配置的参考小区;The reference cell includes at least one of the following: a source cell, a cell that is on the same frequency carrier as the candidate cell and has been detected, a special cell of a cell group corresponding to the candidate cell, and a reference cell configured by a network device;所述预设规则包括以下至少一项:候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的时隙数由时隙数域的取值决定、候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的符号数由符号数域的取值决定、候选小区与参考小区的相同编号的帧之间时间差包含的采样间隔数由采样间隔数域的取值和/或采样间隔数因子决定。The preset rules include at least one of the following: the number of time slots included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the time slot number field, the number of symbols included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the symbol number field, and the number of sampling intervals included in the time difference between frames with the same number between the candidate cell and the reference cell is determined by the value of the sampling interval number field and/or the sampling interval number factor.
- 如权利要求1所述的方法,其中,还包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 1, further comprising at least one of the following:第一下行信息包括物理下行控制信道命令和/或小区切换命令;The first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command;下行同步信息包括候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域、频率内候选小区判定域、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域中的至少一项;The downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance-to-reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field;保存或更新或清空下行同步信息;Save, update or clear downlink synchronization information;第二下行信息包括候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元、下行控制信息及下行信号中的至少一项。The second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and a downlink signal.
- 如权利要求6所述的方法,其中,保存或更新或清空候选小区的下行同步信息,包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 6, wherein saving, updating or clearing downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell comprises at least one of the following:响应于检测到或接收到新的同步广播块,保存或更新候选小区的下行同步信息,和/或,重启候选小区对应的下行同步信息时效性定时器;In response to detecting or receiving a new synchronization broadcast block, saving or updating downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell, and/or restarting a downlink synchronization information validity timer corresponding to the candidate cell;响应于候选小区对应的下行同步信息时效性定时器超时,清空候选小区的下行同步信息;In response to the downlink synchronization information validity timer corresponding to the candidate cell expiring, clearing the downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;响应于发送或接收到指示信息,清空所述指示信息对应的候选小区以外的候选小区的下行同步信息;In response to sending or receiving the indication information, clearing downlink synchronization information of candidate cells other than the candidate cell corresponding to the indication information;响应于完成下行同步和/或收到确认指示,清空对应的候选小区的下行同步信息。In response to completing downlink synchronization and/or receiving a confirmation indication, clearing downlink synchronization information of the corresponding candidate cell.
- 一种控制方法,其中,包括步骤:A control method, comprising the steps of:S2:发送第一下行信息,以使终端设备基于第一下行信息和/或下行同步信息对候选小区进行下行同步。S2: Send the first downlink information so that the terminal device performs downlink synchronization on the candidate cell based on the first downlink information and/or downlink synchronization information.
- 如权利要求8所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the method further comprises:S1:发送第二下行信息,以使终端设备基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息。S1: Send the second downlink information so that the terminal device acquires or obtains the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information.
- 如权利要求9所述的方法,其中,包括以下至少一项:The method of claim 9, comprising at least one of the following:所述第一下行信息包括物理下行控制信道命令和/或小区切换命令;The first downlink information includes a physical downlink control channel command and/or a cell switching command;所述下行同步信息包括候选小区标识域、提前于参考小区判定域、频率内候选小区判定域、子帧数域、时隙数域、符号数域以及采样间隔数域中的至少一项;The downlink synchronization information includes at least one of a candidate cell identification field, an advance reference cell determination field, an intra-frequency candidate cell determination field, a subframe number field, a time slot number field, a symbol number field, and a sampling interval number field;第二下行信息包括候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元、下行控制信息及下行信号中的至少一项。The second downlink information includes at least one of a candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit, downlink control information and a downlink signal.
- 如权利要求9所述的方法,其中,所述终端设备基于第二下行信息获取或得到下行同步信息的步骤包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 9, wherein the step of the terminal device acquiring or obtaining the downlink synchronization information based on the second downlink information comprises at least one of the following:所述终端设备根据候选小区指示介质访问控制层控制单元和/或下行控制信息选取或确定候选小区,获取或得到候选小区的下行同步信息;The terminal device selects or determines a candidate cell according to the candidate cell indication medium access control layer control unit and/or downlink control information, and acquires or obtains downlink synchronization information of the candidate cell;所述终端设备根据下行信号确定候选小区的测量结果,获取或得到测量结果满足预设条件的候选小区对应的下行同步信息。The terminal device determines the measurement result of the candidate cell according to the downlink signal, and obtains or acquires the downlink synchronization information corresponding to the candidate cell whose measurement result meets the preset conditions.
- 一种通信设备,其中,包括:存储器、处理器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的控制程序,所述控制程序被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求1或8所述的控制方法的步骤。A communication device, comprising: a memory, a processor, and a control program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, wherein the control program implements the steps of the control method as claimed in claim 1 or 8 when executed by the processor.
- 一种存储介质,其中,所述存储介质上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1或8所述的控制方法的步骤。 A storage medium, wherein a computer program is stored on the storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the control method according to claim 1 or 8 are implemented.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2023/091883 WO2024221471A1 (en) | 2023-04-28 | 2023-04-28 | Control method, communication device, and storage medium |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2023/091883 WO2024221471A1 (en) | 2023-04-28 | 2023-04-28 | Control method, communication device, and storage medium |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2024221471A1 true WO2024221471A1 (en) | 2024-10-31 |
Family
ID=93255432
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2023/091883 WO2024221471A1 (en) | 2023-04-28 | 2023-04-28 | Control method, communication device, and storage medium |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
WO (1) | WO2024221471A1 (en) |
Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN105992286A (en) * | 2015-02-02 | 2016-10-05 | 苏州简约纳电子有限公司 | District synchronization method when LTE terminal switches districts and LTE terminal |
CN107690163A (en) * | 2016-08-03 | 2018-02-13 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Cell switching method and device |
CN115915378A (en) * | 2021-08-13 | 2023-04-04 | 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 | TA-based synchronization method, equipment, device and storage medium |
-
2023
- 2023-04-28 WO PCT/CN2023/091883 patent/WO2024221471A1/en unknown
Patent Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN105992286A (en) * | 2015-02-02 | 2016-10-05 | 苏州简约纳电子有限公司 | District synchronization method when LTE terminal switches districts and LTE terminal |
CN107690163A (en) * | 2016-08-03 | 2018-02-13 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Cell switching method and device |
CN115915378A (en) * | 2021-08-13 | 2023-04-04 | 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 | TA-based synchronization method, equipment, device and storage medium |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2020063344A1 (en) | Configuration method, receiving method, terminal and network side device | |
JP2021530914A (en) | Paging instruction method, equipment and system | |
AU2019316839A1 (en) | Determination method, terminal and network device | |
CN114641077B (en) | Data transmission method, communication device, and storage medium | |
WO2020147824A1 (en) | Cell selection or reselection method and device, and terminal | |
CN110096375B (en) | Method and device for sharing data by application programs and computer readable storage medium | |
JP7235874B2 (en) | Connection management method, terminal and network side equipment | |
CN110677897B (en) | Network search control method, terminal and computer readable storage medium | |
CN111263437B (en) | Transmission method, equipment and medium for paging message | |
CN111970738B (en) | Network switching control method, device and computer readable storage medium | |
WO2023221831A1 (en) | Processing method, communication device, and storage medium | |
WO2024221471A1 (en) | Control method, communication device, and storage medium | |
WO2023130954A1 (en) | Processing method, communication device and storage medium | |
CN114630406A (en) | Power consumption control method, intelligent terminal and storage medium | |
WO2021088968A1 (en) | Handover method, configuration method, terminal, and network device | |
WO2024168601A1 (en) | Cell handover method, communication device, and storage medium | |
WO2024164259A1 (en) | Control method, communication device, and storage medium | |
WO2024174261A1 (en) | Control method, communication device, and storage medium | |
WO2024168872A1 (en) | Processing method, communication device, and storage medium | |
WO2024092513A1 (en) | Control method, communication device, and storage medium | |
WO2024164225A1 (en) | Transmission parameter determination method, communication device, and storage medium | |
WO2024229668A1 (en) | Control method, communication device, and storage medium | |
WO2024192672A1 (en) | Processing method, communication device, and storage medium | |
WO2024221248A1 (en) | Processing method, communication device and storage medium | |
EP4195804A1 (en) | Processing method, communication device, communication system and storage medium |